JP6722213B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Patent Document 1, an active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display, and a gaming machine has been proposed that changes the display mode of the active display each time a pseudo continuous variation is executed.

JP, 2016-144583, A (Drawing 36).

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

Means MA gaming machine,
A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Holding storage means for storing information regarding variable display as holding storage;
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold storage,
When starting the variable display, and can display the display control means as a corresponding view the hold display corresponding to the variable display,
A change suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
Equipped with
Depending on the aspect of the correspondence display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The change suggestion effect includes a success pattern in which the correspondence display changes, and a failure pattern in which the correspondence display does not change,
When the number of times the success pattern change suggestion effect has been executed in the predetermined period of the variable display is a predetermined number , a specific period that is a period later than the predetermined period of the variable display than when the number of times is less than the predetermined number. In the above , the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed is high ,
Depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success pattern is continuously executed, the proportion of the aspect of the correspondence display is different,
It is characterized by
Also, as a gaming machine of the means M1,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
The change suggestion effect executing means displays the change suggestion effect in a success mode as the change suggestion effect (the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 11-18). A mode change effect) and a failure mode change suggestion effect (as shown in (10) and (20) of FIG. 11-19, the effect in which the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed. ) Is possible,
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, within a predetermined period (for example, within a period from the start of variation until the reach state is established, a decorative pattern from the start of variation (re-fluctuation (pseudo-link) after temporary stop is performed). Within the period until the combination of different decorative patterns or the pseudo-relational pattern) is temporarily stopped, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns) The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change rate is 100%. If the suggestive effect is executed and once is the success mode and once is the failure mode, the change suggestive effect for the third time may not be executed).
It may be characterized.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and improve the interest.

The game machine of means M2 is
A gaming machine of means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the final display of the active display). The expectation of jackpots varies depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The larger the number is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and even if the active display is the same display color, the larger the number of times the success mode change suggestion production is continuous, the higher the jackpot expectation is.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make interest in the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, and to improve the interest.

The game machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
Variable display of decorative patterns can be executed,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, a temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative pattern. (Fluctuating direction does not change)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1)). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed as shown in FIG. 11-18(4)).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion production) in which
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D does. Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a game machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to the means K1 to K7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Equipped with display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the sub-active display area 30TM105) which is different from the first information display area and is compatible with the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display. It is possible to execute display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005),
The rate at which the aspect of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the aspect of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 11-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display aspect rather than the active display 30TM003. The rate of selecting a mode different from the mode is low, and the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information, as the information corresponding to the common variable display, so that the interest regarding the information corresponding to the variable display can be improved. In addition to being able to perform, it is possible to make the aspect of the first information and the second information interested.

The game machine of means K2 is
A gaming machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). , The blue mode sub-holding display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the changed aspect of the first information and the second information is different, it is possible to clearly distinguish and grasp each information.

The game machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8(2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is more than the normal display mode of the display 30TM003 and the normal display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher is the red mode)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information can be focused on, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in the same mode as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the same display color is displayed. Shape display) is displayed),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105), and a second corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable hold can be displayed in the same mode as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( 9), as shown in (10), when the red mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display) shifts to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color) having the same display color is displayed. (Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to make the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information interested.

The game machine of means K5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K4,
The player is provided with notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an notification effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area in which the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information along with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is also displayed while the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the word "REACH!!" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active information are displayed. (While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information for the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and performs the action of throwing a ball, and the sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 causes the character a to appear. Then, it is the mode to execute the action to fly the balloon.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the aspects of the first action effect and the second action effect are different, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the above is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different when the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed (active as shown in FIG. 11-3. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed The expectation for a big hit is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a game machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to means L1 to means L7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Equipped with display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the sub-active display area 30TM105) which is different from the first information display area and is compatible with the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display. It is possible to execute display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005),
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is (When changed, the sub-holding display area 30TM104 does not display the sub-holding display 30TM004, and the sub-active display area 30TM105 does not display the sub-active display 30TM005).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, the first information and the second information, as the information corresponding to the common variable display, the complication of the effect is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
A gaming machine of means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). , The blue mode sub-holding display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the changed aspect of the first information and the second information is different, it is possible to clearly distinguish and grasp each information.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8(2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is more than the normal display mode of the display 30TM003 and the normal display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher is the red mode)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information can be focused on, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in the same mode as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the same display color is displayed. Shape display) is displayed),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105), and a second corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable hold can be displayed in the same mode as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( 9), as shown in (10), when the red mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display) shifts to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color) having the same display color is displayed. (Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to make the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information interested.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
The player is provided with notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an notification effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area in which the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information along with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is also displayed while the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the word "REACH!!" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active information are displayed. (While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information for the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and performs the action of throwing a ball, and the sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 causes the character a to appear. Then, it is the mode to execute the action to fly the balloon.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the aspects of the first action effect and the second action effect are different, the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the above is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different when the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed (active as shown in FIG. 11-3. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed The expectation for a big hit is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), an active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display, and a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the active display each time a pseudo continuous variation is executed is proposed. Has been done. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to means N1 to N6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
As the change suggesting effect, the change suggesting effect executing means hits the active display 30TM003 with the ball thrown by the character A as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. The effect of changing the display mode) and the change suggestion of the failure mode (as shown in (10) and (20) of FIG. 11-19, the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. Can be performed)
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation until the reach state is established, a decorative pattern from the start of fluctuation (a combination of decorative patterns or a pseudo continuous pattern in which re-fluctuation (pseudo continuous) will be performed after temporary stop) is temporary Within the period until the stop, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when any of the decorative patterns on the left, middle and right stops first) to the number of executions of the change suggestion production in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion production Accordingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), [the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect] to [the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect]. The higher the ratio of, the more likely it is to have a high jackpot expectation. For example, when [the number of executions of change suggestion effect of success mode/the number of executions of change suggestion effect] is 2/3, the display mode is blue. Therefore, the display mode in the case of 4/5 is a red mode with a higher jackpot expectation.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
The proportion controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) varies depending on the mode of the correspondence display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the jackpot expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The larger the number is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and even if the active display is the same display color, the larger the number of times the success mode change suggestion production is continuous, the higher the jackpot expectation is.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make interest in the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, and to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
Variable display of decorative patterns can be executed,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, a temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative pattern. (Fluctuating direction does not change)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1)). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed as shown in FIG. 11-18(4)).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion production) in which
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D does. Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention relating to means A1 to means A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming device capable of performing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, savings, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
An imparting means (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the dispensing motor 21TM289) for imparting a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of big hit determination random numbers) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode.
Equipped with
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the gaming device is limited (1. When the setting change mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control microcomputer The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame open sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a connection confirmation command when it is controlled in the setting change mode (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), the payout control is performed. (Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the gaming control microcomputer 100 causes the lock switch 21TM051 to be in the ON state. And the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the control is controlled to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, since the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Do not lend a ball.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 which outputs a connection confirmation signal is a setting change). After the mode ends, after the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and the gaming device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. It is possible to add the game medium based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
When the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. When the connection confirmation signal is not input, the PRDY signal is not turned on, 2. Connection confirmation When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
At least one of the game control means and the giving means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened ( A gaming machine frame that includes a gaming machine frame opening sensor that can detect that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a door frame opening sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a). Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened to control the setting change mode, it is possible to restrict the addition of the game medium.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The grant means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns the EXS signal on) in response to the grant request signal being input from the gaming device (the BRQ signal being turned on), and the grant preparation signal When a grant command signal output from the gaming device according to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is granted,
When controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not do),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch). ) 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A6,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the set value is blinked on display monitor 21TM029), the game state is initialized. That the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029,
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is completed and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means A8,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine.
And a production control unit (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means A9,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when turning on the power). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming device capable of performing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, savings, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of big hit determination random numbers) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and the payout control for which the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received while the connection confirmation signal is on The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled by the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control load when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode. ..

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The predetermined control is interrupted on the basis of occurrence of a predetermined event (power interruption, etc.) while executing the predetermined control, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is subsequently controlled, the setting is changed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and restarts the power supply. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is restarted after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without immediately restarting the ball lending),
It is characterized by
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
When the setting control mode is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during execution of the ball lending). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. The ball lending will not be resumed after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), it is notified that the game state is initialized (display Display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is completed and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine.
And a production control unit (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when turning on the power). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control when the game medium passes through the specific area. The invention relating to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Based on that the game medium has passed through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control according to the set value (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges for jackpot determination random numbers) (special Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in the symbol process processing),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The game machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the set value is blinked on display monitor 21TM029), the game state is initialized. That the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029,
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is completed and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C3,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine.
And a production control unit (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
When controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed while the set value is being confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when turning on the power). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute appropriate processing when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means D1 to means D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The game machine of means D1 is
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of big hit determination random numbers) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value.
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value) for storing the setting value;
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch ( The setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and the setting change mode is controlled.
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state) and does not satisfy the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear). The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The set value storage means stores a set value before being controlled in the setting change mode while being controlled in the setting change mode (stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 102 before shifting to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without changing with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on). If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the shift to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns on the clear switch 21TM052 to an ON state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed,
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is displayed blinking on display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can know that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D3,
A game control means (a game control micro that executes a game control timer interruption process) that has the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine. Computer 100),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) that executes control of production,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means D5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D4,
Timing after power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 becomes able to execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) Then, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch) ) When the setting change switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "the operation of the setting change switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of the processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is
A game machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing (change to setting change mode, change to setting confirmation mode) related to the change of the set value. ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of the means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting can be changed by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on being controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal Security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the change mode may be controlled.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting confirmation mode can be controlled (the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on. Based on that, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the specific signal can be used to confirm the setting. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control operates the lock switch 21TM051). When the lock switch operation command indicating that, the setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated is received from the gaming control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected. ," a warning "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the information related to the set value, but JP 2014-200506 A. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 is made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A game machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a special signal (a signal corresponding to the setting change) corresponding to the processing related to the change of the set value (the change to the setting change mode, the change to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting mode,
Outputs the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the confirmed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to output a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is in an ON state during the period when the setting change mode is controlled) is output, and upon completion of the setting change mode. After the output of the special signal is once stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off at the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the set value that has been confirmed) Change corresponding signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
Outputting a special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal notifying whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F5 is
A gaming machine of means F4,
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is in an ON state during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is once stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off at the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the displayed set value is changed). Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of output times of the pulse-like setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting value can be easily specified in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F6,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F9,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting mode,
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output with the end of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated previously, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal) ,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting change mode). Output the setting change corresponding signal, and output the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is finished, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) by a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the big hit game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. The number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value is output),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the setting value to the outside with a predetermined trigger, it is possible to increase the chances that the setting value can be specified in the external device.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention according to means G1 to means G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a game value (pachinko ball),
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of big hit determination random numbers) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
An open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the gaming machine frame (gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine frame 3) is opened. Means (game provided with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) A payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300),
Regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or not, when the open state is detected, the giving of the game value is limited (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the game medium is not paid out in the ball lending process and the prize ball process),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value while being controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of the means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) is the open state detection means (a game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided with a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. When it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processes in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps are executed),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled when the open state of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage unit (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of the setting change flag) capable of specifying that the control has been performed in the setting change mode,
The specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can bring the game to a stopped state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the condition for changing to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the condition does not shift to the normal game process and loops until the power is turned off),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, the game can be stopped when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting change flag) is erased (YES in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. Ends and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
The game control means for controlling the progress of the game (the game control microcomputer 100 for executing the game control timer interrupt processing) is provided,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither opening of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game medium is paid out),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether to give the game value or not, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the fact that the information (payout number) relating to the award of the game value is received from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 which executes the game control timer interrupt process), the game value is awarded,
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (unpaid amount) about the game value to be given,
The storage means can store the additional information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the granting means executes the granting of the game value according to the grant information stored in the storage means (power is cut off while paying out the game medium. If it occurs, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the payout that has been interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the number of game media not paid out is paid out),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to store the additional information regarding the gaming value to be provided after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the information is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add a game value corresponding to the added information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G6,
Can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) gives a game value based on a signal (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the addition of the game value based on the signal output from the gaming device is limited (the gaming machine frame door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine). When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not send the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and the game medium is paid out. Not),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect associated with the granting operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when turning on the power). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
The game state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control in the setting confirmation mode (when the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state when controlled in the setting change mode, in step S21TM3040). If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed On the basis of the clear switch 21TM052 being in the OFF state, the determination is NO in step S21TM3040, and the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or the determination is NO in step S21TM3140, and thus step S21TM3150. Does not move to),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
A storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (data of the unpaid amount) to be given,
The added information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. Number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the imparted information regarding the gaming value to be imparted, so that the management at the gaming shop can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
A storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (data of the unpaid amount) to be given,
The added information is not initialized regardless of whether the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized (the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). Also, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of unpaid number storage buffers formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the imparted information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the gaming value to be imparted can be appropriately protected.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With regard to the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value are displayed on the external device side. In some cases, it is necessary to distinguish them, but even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The inventions relating to the means H1 to H5 are made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the external device side divides the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. It is to provide a game machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of the means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame/door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine, and processing related to changing the set value (setting change) It is possible to output a specific signal according to the
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode by executing the RAM clear). Output for 30 seconds, and when RAM clear is executed and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
A gaming machine of the means H1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting check mode is controlled (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). Is output for a period of adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, output for a period of adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when turning on the power). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control, When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected.", "The operation of the setting changeover switch is detected." is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H3,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing related to setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode),
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing related to setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above situation, and provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of the processing related to the set value on the external device side. ..

The game machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
Output of a specific signal (security signal) is started in response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
Stops the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode). , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means I2 is
A gaming machine of means I1,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame/door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (the security signal indicates that RAM clear is performed. If it is not controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting check mode is controlled (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). Is output for a period of adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, output for a period of adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means I4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I3,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when turning on the power). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control, When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected.", "The operation of the setting changeover switch is detected." is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means I5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I5,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

There has been proposed a game machine that displays a title to notify the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect (see, for example, JP-A-2016-101428). In the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect. The inventions relating to the means J1 to the means J8 have been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having an enhanced effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

The gaming machine of the means J2, in the gaming machine of the means J1,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8-2(C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J3 is the gaming machine of the means J1 or the means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

The gaming machine of means J4 is one of the gaming machines of means J1 to J3,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J5 is the gaming machine of the means J4,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is one of the gaming machines of means J1 to J5,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J7 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J6,
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
And a specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10(E), FIG. 8-11(I). )),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection unit, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J7,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size to be displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12(a)) Display, etc.) and a second suggestion display having a display size of the second size (such as the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12D). Means (for example, image display device 5, CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) including the above),
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. 8-12(a) and (d), the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of some storage areas in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main substrate RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted/received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the ball lending limiting method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball loan limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which does not restrict a ball loan during a setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing an example of restarting payout after the end of the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing an example of forcibly ending the payout due to the transition to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during a period when the gaming machine frame or the glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output aspect of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output aspect and output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. .. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restricting the ball lending based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending after the open state detection of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending, without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and forcibly terminating a ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram showing a method of limiting prize ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram showing a method of restarting the prize ball payout after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a prize ball payout, without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing diagram showing a method of forcibly ending the prize ball payout by shifting to a setting change mode after the power is turned off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a prize ball payout after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display. It is a flow chart which shows change production decision processing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is an explanatory view showing a pending change pattern in the first change effect. It is an explanatory view showing a pending change pattern in the first change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending|holding change pattern in a 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect in the first change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production aspect of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production aspect of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production aspect of change suggestion production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to the small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed in the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (eg, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of reserved figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted as described above is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when the "big hit" is set Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether the reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125, which receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the main board 11 receives an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command for ending the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit mid-game production process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit medium production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach lost pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is "missed". -2, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". Reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1(B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in Fig. 8-1(B), the reliability when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach. Reach B becomes higher in the order of super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) the reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1(B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is informed of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is informed of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated and the effect of production is improved. The title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2(A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect of the super reach (also referred to as super reach effect) is completed, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 (here, “SP reach A” here) of the super reach A is displayed on the entire screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here “super reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

When the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2(E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B which is to be confronted with is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect and the like, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C)→(D)→(E)...) and super reach B (FIG. 8-2(C)→(F)→(G)...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach is performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title is notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the name of the reach title (here, "defeat the enemy"), thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to exactly match the reach of the big hit of the reach.

It should be noted that the notification by the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of the reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of the reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be one (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display areas for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B having a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D having a jackpot reliability lower than that of super-reach A and super-reach B is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, the expectation level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation level may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Timing display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the below-described determination effect is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 8-3(C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-3(D), A fixed decorative design that is a combination of big hits is derived. If the display result is "miss", an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is finished before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

In addition, when displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, during the reach effect of super reach, it is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Then, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), the title of the super reach A is notified, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of the super reach B is notified and the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8D, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4(B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating a failure) is displayed. It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and It is also possible to execute the anticipation suggestion effect in which the anticipation degree is suggested by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star in the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5(F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases. You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

FIGS. 8-5(G) to (L) are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5(G). At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star in the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound “Pong” indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 8-5(L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., by varying the title notification mode, the effect is diversified and the effect effect is increased. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation level) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect in which the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6(A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed in accordance with the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7(B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound according to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, the effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Figure 8-9(A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and "black" to "fruit pattern". There are those that change, and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of changing the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of super-reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9(B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined in a ratio different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode of the dialogue of the character in the reach production of the super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach effect of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Fig. 8-9(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from "white", "red", and "white" to "red". ), the jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, in the case where the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice mode is obtained. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that instead of the announcement of the dialogue, the announcement production of announcing the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the production mode of the reach production. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of timings for changing the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies depending on the change timing.

After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice can be executed in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low-reliability super reach). Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be enabled. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and for example, the determination rate may be changed depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of the effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either the title or the dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the character action or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title as in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title or the expectation suggestion display. In this case, the title or the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification regarding other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) having different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5 as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the zone that has been moved The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of mission titles.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win/loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of an operation operation of super reach in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10(E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11(H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11(I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time when the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed at the central portion as shown in FIG. 8-11(K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11(L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11(M), a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11(L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach notification and the expectation degree indication are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title showing the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification of outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 8-12(c).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the display returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 8-12(f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12A and 8D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the determination regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11, the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that configures the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 and FIG. 9-5(A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided. , It also has a function to display various winning information about winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5(A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (big winning openings, second starting winning openings, first starting winning openings, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entry area". (Also referred to as) the total number of game balls entering the game ball, and various prize information such as continuous ratio and winning combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information are displayed. By doing so, various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when performing the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as often as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment was made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk of the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not being supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. To be executed. By disposing the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to recover the key, so that the store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower portion of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is provided with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates the ball burnout state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Which is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) a signal through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted/received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (the prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the award ball request signal from the game controlling microcomputer 100, sends a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that to the game controlling microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of a prize ball request signal, and the prize having the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and sets the received ACK signal to the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, full tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is made. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. It should be noted that the specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives, through the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls on a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). (Including and) output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending possible LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted/received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point in time, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lent balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage not lower than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

9-4(A) to 9(F) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the object of variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", it will win the jackpot with a lower probability (1/300). ing. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is designed to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of "2" (1/280). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is designed to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, information about game prizes, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting prize hole (belt), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), large prize hole The number of prize balls due to winning the (Attacker), the total number of prize balls are input, and the number of shot balls is totaled. The display monitor 21TM029 displays the number of prize balls due to winning the major winning opening (Attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The percentage of consecutive balls (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the prize hole (attacker) to the total number of prize balls A certain winning ratio (%) and a base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The consecutive ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of balls that have been obtained as consecutive winnings below) due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker). The winning ratio is the number of prize balls due to winning at the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the big prize hole (attacker) (the number of prize balls obtained below) Is the proportion occupied by. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the great winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls obtained by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (Den Chu). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the expected winning rate of the gaming balls changes as the passable width of the playing balls changes. is there. Also, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. Therefore, the expected winning rate of the game ball is a fixed character.

As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the continuous ratio and the winning ratio, the winning balls by winning the first starting winning hole (navel) and the general winning hole (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000 pieces Number (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize awards balls (Den Chu prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), depending on the prize at the big prize hole (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning at the first starting prize hole (navel) and general prize hole (sode) to be totaled, the number of normal electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and special electricity The number of winning prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, 6000 11 sets of memory are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

The display monitor 21TM029 has a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative total ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the last 60,000 prize balls. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting prize hole (helso), which is aggregated as the game progresses, to the second starting prize hole (den Chu) The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning a prize hole (belt), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), the number of prize balls by winning the major prize opening (attacker), the prize ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and totalizing the total number at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%)).

In addition, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and is a general winning award ball, a first starting winning award mouth ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric role. The prize balls, the prize balls total, and the hit total are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, the winning combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of role-acquiring balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of balls to be won refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and the electric chu. Further, the number of consecutive winning character balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).

Consecutive ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive role acquisition balls + Number of role acquisition balls) / Total number acquired] x 100 (2)

Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total driving] x 100 (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls acquired is 42000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are rounded down) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning accessory balls is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the character ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of accessory acquisition balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition number of balls 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition number of balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are both 10. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

The substrate case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. Here, the “direct front” means the front directly from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means the space between the main board 11 and an employee who is going to visually recognize the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition number of balls 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition number of balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

In addition, a storage area (ring buffer, 10-set total buffer (total of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters each having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of acquired balls is larger than the value of the stored total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area that stores information related to game winnings, such as when the number of balls for continuous winnings is greater than the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display or the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while or after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

In the calculation of the winning ratio (%), if the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired accessory balls is 19876 as an example, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876. It becomes 198776/34321=0.57912..., and it is calculated that the combination ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing the arithmetic operation in the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid the calculation with the decimal point, and therefore, the following calculation formula is substituted. In the division of 198776/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 1987/343=57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the winning combination (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, there is an error in display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. If this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and if replaced with the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69%→70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of the error of 1%.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, until the counter counts the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) above a certain number, the ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if it is displayed may be notified by emitting light from a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the winning combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event that a game medium is newly won in the electric Chu or attacker occurs, and accordingly, the calculated value is 5 seconds later and the consecutive ratio ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided in two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5(A) can display numerical values in the lower two digits, but in this case also, numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is exemplified that the game medium is detected by the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric Chu, and the number of each prize ball is individually tabulated based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after the discharge passages through which the game media won in the attacker and the game media won in the electric chu are discharged are combined, and the detection result is used. It is also possible to add up the number of winning role balls and the number of consecutive winning role balls.

Hereinafter, the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting prize number counter, a second starting prize number counter, a first general prize number counter, a second general prize number counter, a third general prize number counter, and a fourth number. A general prize number counter and a large prize number counter are provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the special winning number counter is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winnings The first big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the mouth and the second big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the second big winning port are individually provided, and the number of winnings to the first big winning port is provided. Alternatively, the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be individually counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general prize number counter to the fourth general prize number counter are counters that count the number of game balls detected by the first general prize port switch to the fourth general prize port switch. The special winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power board shown in FIG. 9C. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the continuous ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, and is a switch operated when the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination is impaired, and the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination is forced to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated during the collection of the data for calculating the normal ratio and the winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

Incidentally, the RTC 106 is provided on the main board 11 as described above, and the present time can be detected by the RTC 106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A). A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 21TM201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter, also referred to as a "crimped board case").

The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a seal sticker 21TM011S for certifying that the main board 11 is enclosed is attached to the board case 21TM201. The seal sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as the front of the display monitor 21TM029. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5(B) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The 1st digit first display unit 21TM029A displays the aggregated set values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification that notifies the completion of the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode (“C”). ) Is displayed, the counting period is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display section 21TM029C of the third digit, and the fourth display section 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display section of the fifth digit. Numerical values are displayed in percentage on 21TM029E. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

Here, the short term means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big winning game state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In such a case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display section 21TM029C. Further, when the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

The main board 11 enters from the large winning a prize hole (attacker), the first starting winning a prize hole, the second starting winning a prize hole, and the first general winning a prize hole to the fourth general winning a prize hole in calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first starting opening switch 22A and a second starting opening switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning opening switch to a fourth general winning opening switch and an outlet switch 21TM070. A switch process is performed to check the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal).

In this switch processing, which entry area the game ball has entered is specified based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first starting prize number counter and the second starting prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big prize number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number counter When the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070 by adding the values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter, the values of the driving number counter are added to enter the game ball into each entry area. The number (the number of winning game balls to each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the steps for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area are also executed in a series of processes for checking the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning the prize in each prize hole based on the total number of winning game balls in each prize hole, and stores the calculated number of prize balls in the RAM 102 for each prize hole. Let The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball obtained by winning the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)). ), 1st starting prize hole award ball (award ball due to winning at the 1st starting award prize hole (navel)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to award winning at Den Chu), special electric role award ball (to attacker) The number of award balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 separately counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting winning opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first start. The number of winning game balls to the winning openings may be collectively summarized. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and a total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The storage area for the total sum and total sum for 10 sets is configured by a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, it is possible to store data of 256×256×256=167777216, and up to 60,000 pieces of data can be reserved. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio combination ratio storage area for storing ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2) and a base for 10 sets of the previous time (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And a cumulative ratio ratio storage area for storing the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio. Each of the proportion ratio storage areas for storing the proportions and the proportions for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is configured by a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, in the case of storing an integer, the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls to the respective winning openings for 10 sets and calculates the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits with respect to the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address/data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. The same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address/data signal line of the internal register is assigned to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via this register area. Write the data.

Further, the address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

A RAM area (16K byte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is, as shown in FIG. 9-8, a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Reference data referred to by the above-mentioned control program is temporarily stored in the data for the configured control program (may be simply referred to as control program data), and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the various lottery data described above) is temporarily stored.

Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas, data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the cumulative proportion ratio of the total sum. In addition, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area and 10 sets of rational combination ratio storage areas. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored.

In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, the data is divided into 1-byte storage areas in the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

In addition, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9(A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "y" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No2, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E display the short-term combination ratio. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "A" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, in the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E,
Base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18B, the display of the short-term serial ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative serial ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is a display changeover switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, when the set value is "1", the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the display of the base 1, the base 2, the setting value of "2" Short-term running ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative running ratio, total cumulative running ratio, base 1, base 2 display, short-term running ratio when the set value is “3”, short-term running ratio, total cumulative running ratio, total running total It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2. In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “2” and the short-term ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the setting value is “3”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "4", and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the setting value is "4", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “5”.

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "5", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “6”.

Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative running are displayed on the fourth display 21TM029D and the fifth display 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

Note that the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, winning combination, and base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is not limited to this. In the above, only one numerical value or only two numerical values may be displayed among these continuous ratios, winning combinations, and bases.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. ..

Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage of the ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the ratios of the 10 sets and the total sum is updated.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening award balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the values are “66”, “117”, “45”, and “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is set to "27", "81", and "." Update to "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th memory area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th memory area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then, the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts its operation (step S21TM1040).

Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then the RAM 102. The accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 which is input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. .. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that

With the shift to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1130). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the control is performed in the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, it is possible to inform the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting change mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting change mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, display control is executed in which the set value being displayed is incremented by 1 each time a setting change operation is received, and is returned to 1 after 6 is reached.

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), it sets the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the set value being displayed, thereby confirming the set value. Then, the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without being determined as YES in step S21TM1160) and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). (If determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, so that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 can confirm the set value. Switch to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

With the shift to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1210). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It can be specified that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to inform the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting confirmation mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 causes the later-described FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM1320 shown in 13 to determine whether or not the power-off detection process has been executed.

When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 (setting change switch mounted on the power supply board) is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, when it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 9-14). It is determined whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

In this example, as a case where the processing of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where, based on the existence, there is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match) because the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved. If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (processes in step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply was stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 102), and then step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the stored contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output port output An area in which the state is saved (output port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the confirmed set value is stored) is also included in the portion that should not be initialized. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base for each set value is stored is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

Incidentally, in step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or if backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

In this example, as the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 Based on the fact that it was also OFF, the initialization of step S21TM1410 is immediately performed without shifting to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. When the processing is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting is changed. Based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the mode ends and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, the setting is performed. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined to be NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after shifting to the confirmation mode and ending the setting confirmation mode.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, winning combination, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) may be left unchanged. The head address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S21TM1440).

In addition, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control devices 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

CPU103 transmits the setting command which specifies the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to CPU120 for production control (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished, according to the specified setting value.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is determined. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to do, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one round (normal symbol per determination random number If the number of steps between the minimum and maximum possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to that counter.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then the power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Further, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220) and then transmits a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460) and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as the lamp 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the production device such as the game effect lamp 9.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes power-off detection processing (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and under the condition that a game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when the game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process of step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

For example, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) indicates an abnormality. The level of magnetism that is determined is detected, the level of vibration that is determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band that is determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) It is determined that a game stop error has occurred based on the detection of the radio wave.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , When the detection signal is input from the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is detected. The prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays the winning information such as winning ratio, consecutive ratio, base and the like, and prize information processing for calculating winning information (step S21TM1640), and displaying the winning information such as winning ratio, consecutive ratio, and base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), the abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag is set and the step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped in S21TM1615 (switch processing is not executed). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B, open/close operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of one side.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, the effect After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. Then, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enable state, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

In the command control processing of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display has ended It is also possible to notify the effect control board 12 of the set value periodically by transmitting information including the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an existing command such as. Furthermore, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute productions suggesting the set values at various timings, such as during variable display and jackpot game. May be.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15(A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15(B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the clerk at the amusement hall or the like clears the switch (setting switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 to set values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

In this manner, in the state where the set value is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. 9-15C, the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by the clerk at the game hall. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display section 21TM029A is changed to 1→2→3→ It is updated and displayed as 4→5→6→1→.... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (in this example, the set value “1”) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15(D), the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1180), and then stores the set value in the RAM 102. The stored setting value (setting value “1” in this example) is the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the setting value (setting value “2” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 informs the clerk of the game hall that the new setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 by blinking the first display portion 21TM029A, and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Notification of completion of setting) (step S21TM1200).

After the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area is displayed). The stored setting value "2") and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value "2" in this example) are not changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed after the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off.

Then, the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) is ended, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state at the time of power failure stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. By doing so, the game state is initialized, but the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the RAM clearing process has been executed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the store clerk or the like of the game hall recognizes that the initialization process has been executed after the setting change mode has ended (the setting value has been confirmed). Then, by executing the processing of step S21TM1430 and thereafter, a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed.

In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the mode in which the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, but the setting value most advantageous to the player (“6” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

In addition, the CPU 103, in response to the end of the setting change mode, notifies the display monitor 21TM029 after the RAM clear notification that the continuous ratio and the role corresponding to the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as the continuous ratio, winning combination, and base corresponding to each set value may be displayed in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value) on the display monitor 21TM029.

When the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16(A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16(B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. When the power is turned on in step S21TM1120 of the main process (in the case of N in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 executes the processes of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A)). The set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

Note that, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk or the like in the game hall, the first display unit The numerical value displayed on the 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game hall while the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (this example Then, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the control of the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The set value "1" stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing of step S21TM1320 and thereafter, a game is possible, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like are executable. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to the RAM clear, except when it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value (setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. That is, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch). ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

In order to change or display the set value (in order to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk or the like of the amusement arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to (1), the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not perform. In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the game machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or neither) when the power is turned on, and the initialization process can be performed. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization processing is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clearing is not executed unless NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the clerk at the game hall wants to confirm the set value while the player is playing the game, even if the player turns off the power and then shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the game state remains It will not be initialized and will not be a disadvantage to the player. On the side of the game arcade, the setting confirmation mode allows confirmation of the set value without any trouble.

Further, the CPU 103, in response to the end of the setting confirmation mode, displays the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029, such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. You may make it display each aggregated value of. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as the continuous ratio, winning combination, and base corresponding to each set value may be displayed in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value) on the display monitor 21TM029.

9-17 is a setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which the notification of the shift to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-17(1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 9-17(2) is an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17(1), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17(1), based on the fact that the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1140 in the main process, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "setting is being changed", and outputs a voice (for example, a voice "setting is being changed") notifying that the speaker 8L, 8R has shifted to the setting change mode, and the game is played. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, white blinking manner) to notify that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, so the setting change It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17(1), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hit display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123. When the image display device 5 is not controllable), the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. In other words, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice (for example, a voice "setting is being changed") informing that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters "setting being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17(1), based on the fact that the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the production control board 12 is received in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or in step S21TM1460, the CPU 103 is executed). Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted from the production control board 12 from), the production control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode, It is possible to inform that effect. For example, a voice of "setting change completed" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. With such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended. It will be possible to clearly understand the end.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is The effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted along with the fact that it has been executed, and the effect control CPU 120 having received this command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17(2), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the fact that the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1220 in the main process, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the character "setting confirmation", and outputs a voice (for example, a voice "setting confirmation is in progress") from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode) to notify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17(2), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hit display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123. When the image display device 5 is not controllable), the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. In other words, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been entered (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"), and causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “setting confirmation”.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the fact that the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). Based on the fact that the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on sent from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460 is received), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and notify that effect. For example, a voice (for example, a voice "setting confirmation is in progress") that displays the character "setting confirmation completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R has been entered. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. With such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended. It will be possible to clearly understand the end.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17(2), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is The effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted along with the fact that it has been executed, and the effect control CPU 120 having received this command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished, according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-18(1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 9-18(1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and FIG. 9-18(2) shows the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 9-18(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-18(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command for executing an ending production in the image display device 5 to the production control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the aspect of the ending effect based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (character of “BONUS end”) informing that the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-18(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "clear" mode shown in FIG. 9-18(1), when it is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-18(2), and FIG. In the case of determining the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests a "fine" mode setting shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%) of the “clear” mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect depending on the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished is executed, and particularly, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

Next, the prize ball process (step S21TM1630) in the main process will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 rises (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is sent to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (a connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that the has started. In addition, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize balls can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I/O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370 for use. The connection confirmation signals are each 1-bit data and are transmitted by one signal line. Note that the connection confirmation signal becomes ready for output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like.

As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and output as a control command indicating a predetermined content depending on the set content of the 8-bit data. To be done.

The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is "A0(H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. Is a control command transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x(H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. If a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on a prize or the ball lending operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". When a full-tank error occurs, "1" is set to the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the third bit "x". When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in the 4th bit "x". Thus, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. .. The data content of the prize ball number command is “5x(H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when the game balls are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game balls are played by the winning opening switch corresponding to the general winning opening 10. When it is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, a prize ball number command "01010011" for notifying the number of three prize balls is transmitted, and the general winning opening 10 is sent. When the game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, the prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 is transmitted. Note that either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is configured to be transmitted as a prize ball request signal. It should be noted that the prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (occurrence of winning or the like) being established. In the present embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are made common and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do it.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The data content of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation is completed, so that data indicating error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command without sending error information at that timing. It is possible to do so. Data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The award ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the award ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the award ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what is done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x(H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set to the first bit "x". When a full-tank error occurs, "1" is set to the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the third bit "x". When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in the 4th bit "x". In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the predetermined ball operation has not ended due to a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation in the game control microcomputer 100. The content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100 as well. Like the connection OK command, the prize-ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits (different predetermined bits) according to the error state. Further, one of the connection OK command, the award ball preparing command, and the award ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparing command is a command (signal) that is output not only when an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also when the prize ball operation is being executed.

Note that the prize ball preparing command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted, based on the state where the prize ball operation cannot be performed due to an error. is there.

9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command of the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparing command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505 is input. In FIG. 9-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparing command.

FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission/reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , And sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it sends a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial setting. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to the accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the internal device register setting processing of step S21TM1840 and the processing of step S21TM1850, register setting for setting the channel to be used in timer mode, register setting for enabling interrupt generation, and interrupt vector are set. Register setting is performed. Then, the interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

The interrupt vector set in the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal related to prize ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request). May be included.) is executed.

In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, it is possible to set the interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up interrupt is generated when the CPU internal clock (system clock) is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. ..

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clearing process (step S21TM1880). Further, initial values are set in the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the unpaid prize ball number counter to the unpaid prize ball number counter.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Settings for.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing according to the same processing as the priority order initialization processing performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initialization process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so as to repeatedly generate the timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked, but the state of the input port is checked. Check flag status.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for controlling the payout of a loan ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and for controlling a payout of the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). In addition, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and display control processing for turning on the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-bulb error, prepaid card unit non-connection error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on that the error bit is set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball payout is being performed. When the prize ball payout is completed, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED 21TM053.

Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer have a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020), a prepaid card control process (step S21TM2030), a main control communication process (step S21TM2035), and an information output process (step S21TM2060). And the display control process (step S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmitting and receiving various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while in the interrupt enabled state, the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Perform interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the reception data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether the read reception data is a prize ball number command in the reception interrupt process. When the received data is the prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is the prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined as the prize ball number. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

FIG. 9-25 is for ball lending performed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the communication process of FIG. Here, as will be described later, as a method of limiting the ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the following first to fourth ball lending limiting methods.

First, (1) the first ball lending limitation method, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). In addition, (2) the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The period during which the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. In addition, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, it may not be possible to pay out an appropriate number of game media corresponding to the lending request. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiments, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. The first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described below.

FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is on, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal being both in the ON state. When the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting the ball lending in the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the above-mentioned first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-27.

FIG. 9-27 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the processing of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (paying of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

As described above, while the game is controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the game medium payout. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

It should be noted that, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

FIG. 9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned ON while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). The state is turned off instead of the state.

As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (game medium payout) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. Accordingly, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. As long as it is inoperable, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is usual that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the game is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

FIG. 9-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 9-29, it is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). The PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is turned off without being turned on.

As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. That is, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ. Since both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (paying out game media) is not executed.

As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Since the open state of is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Then, when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

It should be noted that, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Accordingly, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal in the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-30. In the example shown in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

FIG. 9-30 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. If the CPU 103 is electrically connected to 100, the PRDY signal is turned on regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

When the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer. 100 is in a state of being electrically connected), the PRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, a payout control board 21TM037 allows a payout operation), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, a ball lending switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which the predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned on), the CPU 103 sets While the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned on but is turned off. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when a predetermined time elapses with the EXS signal in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out). To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal when the BRQ signal is turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Further, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is in the ON state (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example of returning the BRQ signal to the OFF state and further returning the BRDY signal to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on. The BRQ signal may be kept in the ON state and the BRDY signal may be kept in the ON state even after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the BRQ signal is turned off and the ball lending is automatically executed without operating the ball lending switch 21TM062 again (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending processing according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed), and (2) ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(The method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-31. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state and receiving the connection confirmation command. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100 and When the CPU 103 is in an electrically connected state and is receiving a connection confirmation command, the PRDY signal is output regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

When the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 is in a state in which the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and is in the state of receiving the connection confirmation command, and the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. When the falling edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media is paid out to the player.

In this way, even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to reduce the control load for not executing the payout control during the controlled period. Further, while the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be inspected and the workability can be improved. it can.

The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is completed and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. .. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media ends after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 stops, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and then the processing is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, refer to FIG. 9-32. It will be specifically described by using. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, based on the fact that the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and after the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting is performed. After the termination of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the discontinued payout is restarted.

FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for use) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the processing of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on the termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). Microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the number of unpaid amount data becomes 0 one by one. The payout operation is performed. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored thereafter, the setting concerned After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to restart the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to power failure during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. The example in which the suspended payout processing is restarted after the end of the above is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk at the game hall turning the power switch 21TM055 to the OFF state in order to change or confirm the set value. The power cut may be generated, or the power switch 21TM055 may be turned off at the end of business at the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the detection of the state, the payout process in progress is interrupted, and then the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the interrupted payout process is terminated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power interruption)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed, and the payout is not restarted after the power supply is restored, referring to FIG. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the data of the unpaid amount is not stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid amount storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the processing of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power cutoff (before the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Out of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out due to the suspension (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and then, when the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting change mode or the setting change mode is controlled. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after the confirmation mode ends, the control for backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off during payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) midway by not backing up the unpaid number of data. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the unpaid number of data is backed up, and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored. On the condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the backed up data of the unpaid number (restarting the payout based on the backup data), while the power is restored. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not completed. The payout of the game medium corresponding to the payout number may not be executed.

In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the method of forced termination of the ball lending that accompanies the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly ending the ball lending that accompanies the shift to the setting change mode illustrated in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission/reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (from the time when the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal is received until the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as the received ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

Although not shown, there is a winning during the execution of the communication process for connection confirmation (between the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal is sent from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection OK command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Invalid winning during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing signal transmission/reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing.

As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth opening opening switch 22B. The general winning opening switch, and the switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a big hit determination process and the like. Neither the processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) or the like is executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch and does not execute the big hit determination process or the like. That is, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game sphere by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base total is not executed. In other words, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to add up each item such as ratio, role ratio, and base, so during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, each item is controlled. The processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced since the time period is not reached.

While controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the fact that the game medium passes through each winning opening. And That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the big hit determination process and the like are not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 on the basis of not receiving the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening, the payout control of the prize balls is not executed.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23. Switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and it is possible to send the prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command) Become. Further, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process process including a big hit determination process.

The gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game controlling microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through one of the winning openings (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the game controlling microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 and outputs a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out the game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

If the switching process is executed during the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, the big hit determination random number is extracted, and the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. When the set value before change is a big hit, but the set value after change (set value after confirmation) is not a big hit, a big hit judgment is executed based on a big hit judgment random number, or conversely before the change However, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number, which does not result in a big hit with the set value of (1) but becomes a big hit with the changed set value (set value after confirmation). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the game hall is disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the winning balls are not paid out based on the fact that the gaming balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and the jackpot judging process is not executed, so that the jackpot judgment is made. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the game hall is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. Temporarily, regarding the setting confirmation mode, unlike the setting change mode, it is possible to control when the game control timer interrupt processing is being executed, not when the power is turned on, and the switch processing is performed during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. And, if the special symbol process process can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, similarly to the setting change mode, it is possible to control only when the power is turned on, and the prize balls are not paid out based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the respective winning openings. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). .. Therefore, because the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, if the game is stopped by a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? Whether or not it is determined (step S21TM1615), when it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. In this way, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) is different between when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the game stop error occurs.

By the way, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100, as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium by not transmitting the prize ball number command. In this way, based on the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, It is possible to invalidate the winning.

It should be noted that during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 can be set based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is better not to execute the switch process and the special symbol process process.

In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration itself capable of detecting that the gaming medium has passed through each winning opening). Also good. In the case of adopting such a configuration, as described above, by stopping the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control is not executed by the microcomputer 21TM370, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during gaming machine frame/door frame open detection)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing signal transmission/reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the gaming machine frame/door frame opening detection. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk or the like of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and when the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls have flowed down is not physically connected to the upper plate that stores the flowing down prize balls, if the prize balls are dispensed in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This award ball preparation command is until the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

As described above, while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through the respective winning openings and the winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the payout motor 21TM289. The payout control of prize balls is not executed without driving. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. .. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

When the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of the prize balls, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize balls, and the prize balls are paid. Data of the unpaid number out of the number designated by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in the case, the payout limiting method during the gaming machine frame/door frame open detection shown in FIG. 9-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the gaming machine is controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is usual that the machine frame 3 is opened. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is restricted.

Next, the control when the power is cut off in the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

FIGS. 9-37(1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power interruption, divided into different charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power interruption. The pattern related to the power failure shown in Fig. 9-37(1) shows the control when the power failure occurs in the situation where "the set value is not confirmed" in "during change of the set value". The set value at the time is the set value when the power was last turned on. In addition, the pattern related to power-off shown in FIG. 9-37(2) shows the control in the case where the power-off occurs in the situation where the “set value determination” is performed during “changing the set value”. The set value at power failure recovery is the set value when the power is cut off.

That is, FIG. 9-37(1) shows the setting when the power is cut off in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and there is no “set value determination” operation (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 9-37(2) shows the control related to the value, and the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the “set value determination” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state is performed. Showing.

Further, FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from top to bottom according to the order of occurrence (see “Order” column and “Status” column). ). Further, in FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the ON/OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (sequence 1 to 8) is shown in the “lock switch” column. In the “setting value” column, setting value data (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In addition, in the column of “setting value display” in the drawing, the display contents (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

When the setting change operation is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (sequence 1), as shown in the top row of the “status” column in FIG. 9-37(1). As shown in the "Lock switch" column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37(1), the "set value" at the time of "power on" of the order 1 is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1" at this time. , "1".

Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the “setting value display” column is blank (blank) at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 This indicates that the display of the set value is not started because the process (step S21TM1150) of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area is not yet performed.

After the "power-on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is entered. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in Fig. 9-37(1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "set value" column is the RAM 102. The setting value is "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed, and the "setting value display" column has the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. It is “1” based on the fact that the setting value read out from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A).

Subsequently, when the status of "changing setting values" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37(1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” field remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage By changing the setting value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “setting value display” column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to "2".

Further, when the status of "changing setting value" (order 4) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37(1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” field remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area The setting value stored in is changed from "2" to "3" so that the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. The new value is changed to "3".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37(1), when the power is cut off during “changing the set value” (sequence 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not operated. Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) has not been executed, the “set value” column remains “1”. That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, since the power is cut off, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-37(1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the power is turned on (sequence 6), In the “setting change mode start” situation (sequence 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the “setting value” column remains “1”, and the “setting value display” column also becomes “1”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 7.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the RAM 102 is set when the power is cut off without completing the setting change operation (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state). Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored is The setting value is the value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time (before the power is turned off). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the control in the case where the power failure occurs after the setting value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37(2). The description of the processing part that is common to the case where the power is cut off before the setting value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the "set value determination" shown in order 5 is performed after the "setting value changing" shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the setting value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is "OFF" based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", whereby the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

When the power is cut off in this state (sequence 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the setting value) is executed. The “set value” column is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, since the power is cut off, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-37(2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (sequential 7), the state of the “setting change mode start” thereafter ( In the order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is read. ), the “setting value” column becomes “3” and the “setting value display” column also becomes “3”. It should be noted that the same applies when the setting confirmation mode is controlled instead of the setting change mode in the order 8.

As described above, when the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, it means that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted. Therefore, if the store clerk or the like in the game arcade accidentally shifts the game machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before the shift to the setting change mode can be restored.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is turned off. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed after the power is turned on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control related to the set value becomes unstable. Can be avoided, and appropriate control regarding the set value can be executed.

FIG. 9-38 is a rendering device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) performs notification that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

FIG. 9-38(1) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol) (game control) Timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt processing step S21TM1710). ), when it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt processing), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated The command is transmitted to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) (step S21TM1710 of game control timer interrupt processing). That is, the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-38(2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command, and then the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed, even if the operation is not controlled by any of the setting confirmation modes, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command and, as the abnormal operation warning notification, "detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch." Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the abnormal operation warning notification has a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 9-38(2), Even during the variable display of the symbols, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. does not operate in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to change the setting value. It is possible to clearly understand and confirm whether fraud has been committed. It should be noted that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected (for example, a voice "the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected"), and the game effect lamp 9 May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that the operation for changing the set value is detected.

In the present embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for doing (operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or within the period when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the setting value is being changed illegally.

In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device of the pachinko gaming machine 1, to confirm the illegality. I try to suppress it.

In addition, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, the ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island becomes open. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch ( It becomes possible to operate the setting changeover switch) 21TM052. That is, even when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is irrespective of whether or not the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When an operation is performed, notification that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is performed is performed to strengthen illegal deterrence.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 according to the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and a signal corresponding to each information output terminal is output. To be done.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 seconds. A gaming machine frame/door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame/door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be in the ON state even when there is.

From the third terminal, the all symbol determination frequency signal is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. The all-start signal is output from the fourth terminal. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and is also output when a gaming ball wins in the second starting winning opening. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

One signal for the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. Two big hit signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state when being controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also in the ON state when being controlled in the high base state. That is, a period in which one jackpot signal is in the OFF state and two jackpot signals are in the ON state can be identified as the high base state.

A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and is in the ON state during the period in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output each time 10 out balls (game balls that have been launched into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and have a pulse width of 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening It is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a prize is detected by the switch) and that is output each time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Further, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, the case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is frequently played 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first start prize hole). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, a case in which a switch abnormality is detected is also included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1 When the starting port switch is in the ON state), it is determined that the switch abnormality has been detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. ..

As described above, since the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the misconduct has been performed, and It is possible to notify the outside that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the processing related to the setting change is executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value are output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40(1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed, the security signal is kept in the ON state for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is in the OFF state at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(2), when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned off at the same time with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40(1) Similarly, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

If the RAM clear is executed without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal remains on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

In this way, the security signal remains in the ON state even during the period in which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the security signal is input based on the input. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but regarding the security signal, the parity is changed in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even if the check result is not normal), it remains in the ON state for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the setting control mode or the setting change mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the device can recognize the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting confirmation mode may have been temporarily controlled, and the security signal input can be performed. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the security signal is input based on the input. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be distinguished and recognized.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 9-40(3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, the security signal is output during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, but the security signal is not output during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the period when the setting change mode is controlled. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, if the setting confirmation mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is maintained in the off state because the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-40(5), the RAM clear is executed after the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. If (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(4), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In addition, in the configuration where the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

Thus, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Become a relationship. With such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame/door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame/door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal and the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Since there is a restriction on the assignment of the setting change, it may be difficult to assign the output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39(2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Further, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, the case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is frequently played 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first start prize hole). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, a case in which a switch abnormality is detected is also included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1 When the starting port switch is in the ON state), it is determined that the switch abnormality has been detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of FIG. 9-39(2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and is in the ON state during the period in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

As described above, since the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that an illegal act has been performed, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that processing related to the setting change may have been executed). Further, with the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is changed). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off.) After that, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided in the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the unit number and the setting change correspondence signal. By correlating and displaying the set value determined in advance with each other, it is possible to perform processing for displaying in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the gaming shop via the management device, and the setting values that the administrator has decided in advance and the settings changed in the setting change work. The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management of the settings in a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or performing the setting change work again. it can.

As described above, the setting change corresponding signal temporarily turns off with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, it corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value is output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds, and for example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

As shown in FIG. 9-42(1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode has ended without changing the set value. Although the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, the special mode setting change corresponding signal is set based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output as.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the set value at the end of the setting change mode (when the set value is changed, The changed setting value) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, but at a predetermined predetermined timing, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. It Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid award balls by 1000. Or an event related to the gaming machine error, such as detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a, or detecting a magnetic abnormality, at that time (the predetermined event is When it occurs), a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42(1), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

This makes it possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device is not properly input with the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even if the setting value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined timing thereafter, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraud where the setting value is changed by an inappropriate method.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the setting value being changed in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off, and the setting change stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3 and the setting change corresponding signal is changed. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(2), three pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41(1), the operation for changing the set value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was not changed. In the case, as shown in FIG. 9-41(2), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. There is. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the set value is actually changed. The signal output processing can be simplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is set to 1 based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1. 1 pulse is output as. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), one pulse is output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

As described above, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). The setting value stored in the area, which is the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value It is possible to output the signal for notifying the signal from the common information output terminal.

In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39(2), when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is , 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state becomes OFF, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulses (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Setting change corresponding signal will be output.

(Modification of game control main processing)
Next, another mode relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in the accessible state (step S21TM1060), moves to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43, and clears input through the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to turn on when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that it has been operated is set (step S21TM2210), and initialization processing is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processing (processing shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) accompanying the initialization processing is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. To do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1320 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power loss recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the power-on initialization command in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 9-44). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. It is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting value changeable mode. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted to (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

Here, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined as NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the processing (1) is executed. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Are not controlled by the setting change mode.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the series of processes relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 is the same as step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, description thereof will be omitted.

In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2270) and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Further, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270). S21TM2520) and a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode on the basis of receiving the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by a production device such as 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by a production device such as 9. With such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode Since the effect control CPU 120 side can specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other modified examples of the characteristic unit 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the set value is not limited to this. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). May be With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A), as compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when the set value is changed, it becomes easy to confirm the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display portion 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 in which the game information such as the aggregated base is displayed has been shown. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game status is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly grasped, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information is facilitated. Therefore, the workability can be improved.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in order while being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, It is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6). Stored setting values (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the setting value storage area (setting values stored in the setting value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be confirmed by overwriting the set value). The clerk at the game arcade displayed the setting value to be confirmed by switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) is displayed. The set value can be confirmed as the set value of the game machine.

In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. It may be an enclosed game machine in which a game medium is enclosed in a game machine and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, the information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 through the payout control board 21TM037, For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value It may also include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, the setting change mode has ended, the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer so that the hall computer can specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ..

In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is in the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, is in the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, or the like. Although the example in which the is notified is shown, the microcomputer 100 for game control is not limited to such a form, and is based on being controlled in the setting change mode, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. may notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display is caused to emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode. Based on the fact that it is controlled by, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. informs that it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (for example, 7 The segment indicator may emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an indicator (round number indicator) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, and for instructing the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display device (right-handed display device) or the like is provided to indicate that these display devices are in the process of the setting change mode, it is shown that the process of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. Alternatively, the light may be emitted.

In the above-described embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is set. An example has been shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended without the signal being turned off. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting confirmation mode and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Accordingly, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal may be turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By using this type of signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period during which the device is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

Regarding the expectation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) of the gaming machine and the jackpot expectation. The number of selections) may be changed. For example, even if the jackpot expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (1 or 2), the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even when the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expectation suggesting effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed. The player can be expected, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low jackpot expectation degree, the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is executed accordingly, so that the player can play the pachinko game machine 1 concerned. Since the set value can be expected to be high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the game is played. When a symbol is stopped in response to a player's operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with at least one of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus). In such slot machines, the percentage of the bonus being established varies depending on the set value, and it is possible to change the set value by controlling the slot machine in the setting change mode, and by setting it in the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Forms of Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, details and other forms of the above-mentioned characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are fulcrum points on the hinge mechanism portion, respectively. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door using the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player).

The outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that is an outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape with a center penetrating as viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be viewed.

When a store clerk at the game arcade performs maintenance of the game board surface (for example, a measure to clear a ball clogging, etc.), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) as a fulcrum toward the front side like a door. In order to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back surface side of the game board 2 in order to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. In, by rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism section (one end side) as a fulcrum, It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the opened state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of specifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, and This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes and the like shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This processing is similar to the processing shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the setting change/confirmation processing to be described later is performed (step S21TM3510) and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 causes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to match a regular value, for example, one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), a value (for example, 0) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area. There is a case. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a legal value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

If the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stored, which is stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, winning combination, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized. The notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control devices 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045), The process moves to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, Upon recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 is open, and the glass door frame 3a is open. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it is confirmed whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). .. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to step S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM3020). If the condition 3 is YES (YES in S21TM3030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), and/or the setting value is changed. Confirmation becomes possible, and the game machine frame 3 is closed (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3070), and then the normal game process is performed. ..

In the present embodiment, although the setting value is not allowed to be changed, in order to make it possible to confirm the setting value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, 2) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3060 and S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, (3) under the condition that it is determined in step S21TM3040 that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the set value can be changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is abnormal or some illegal operation. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value, so in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, in step S21TM3060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, the process shifts to the normal game process. In addition, in step S21TM3070, when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the shift to the normal game process, the process corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 becomes executable, and FIG. The game control timer interrupt processing shown can be executed (special symbol process processing can be executed).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the setting value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), and transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area, , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value abnormality error command is transmitted.

Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message "setting value is abnormal" is displayed. To). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message "Please change the setting value" is displayed). It should be noted that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, output a voice "The set value is abnormal."), and change the set value. It is also possible to give a notification that it is in an appropriate state (for example, output a voice "Please change the set value.").

When the CPU 103 transmits the set value abnormality error command, it checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared, and the initial value is set. Is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each area for each of these set values is not cleared. The total value is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), then transmits the initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Move to. It should be noted that the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The command transmission flag may be cleared at the time of shifting to the normal game processing (step S21TM1470-). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

On the other hand, in step S21TM3120, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is cut off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

That is, when the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, In the case where it is determined to be YES in step S21TM3020) and the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state, Before proceeding to the normal game processing, it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the setting value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination process of steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, the set value can be changed ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, when NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is temporarily cut off, and (1) to (3) at the next power-on. All of the conditions are satisfied and the mode is changed to the setting change mode to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sends a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. It may be done. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters “Please turn off the power”) on the image display device 5 in order to turn off the power. .. Further, the CPU 103, when one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. In the processing of FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 sets a setting change flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). .. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode in which it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM3520. When the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and then proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the set confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

Further, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage at power off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set (NO) in the process of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game process. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished, according to the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and power failure occurs during setting change. It is determined that there is not (NO in step S21TM3020), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). No), the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) is not executed. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the normal process when the power is restored, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. When the fact (NO in step S21TM3060) is confirmed, the process may be shifted to the normal game process.

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (YES in step S21TM3530), the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). If the operation for changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes of step S21TM3010 and thereafter.

As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being controllable, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (NO in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM3530). When all the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a waits for the open state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates a command to instruct that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting mode or confirm the setting. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is operated to notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended. For example, the image display device 5 may display a message "Open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode."

Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21TM051 In response to the operation of (is turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch ( In response to the operation of the clear switch) 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38(2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed, even if the operation is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk at the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value is performed even though the operation is not controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and illegal It is possible to check whether or not

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting change switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is controlled, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-3(1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). For the sake of explanation, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. It is updated in the order of →1→2→3→1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E→1→2→3→1.

In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, as the information corresponding to this, information different from the numeral (the letter E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, and prompt the setting change operation. If a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, and if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the game hall. May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, the display monitor 21TM029 displays information different from the numeral (the letter E in this example). By avoiding such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3(1), if the setting value storage area initially stores a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) when the setting change mode is controlled. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if the setting change operation is performed even once and a regular value is stored in the set value storage area, However, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state). The set value storage area does not store a value different from the normal value (0 in this example), and the display monitor 21TM029 also stores information different from the normal value (character E in this example). ) Is never displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3(2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. For the sake of description, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. It is updated in the order of →3→1→2→3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2→3→1→2→3.

That is, when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting changing mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting changing operation is performed thereafter. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state), the set value is updated within the range of the set value, and the set value storage area does not show the set value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, after that, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at the game hall side, if the set value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. Thus, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be set to a regular value.

In addition, the gaming machine manufacturer sets the setting change flag in advance when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped (before installation in the gaming hall), and then the gaming hall goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Thus, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be set to a regular value.

(Restriction on ball lending based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a main board 11, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between a payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) and a card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn on the PRDY signal. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on but the off state while the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

As a result, while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. That is, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since the EXS signal is OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this manner, the PRDY signal is turned on while the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is supposed not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium.

Then, a store clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated unless is opened, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is usual that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the game is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and power-on thereafter, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, a proper amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to know the control status of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, a command and determination processing therefor are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it will become.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or whether it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode are restricted without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. It With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for the ball lending process and the prize ball process.

As described above, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 while the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect associated with the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like of the game machine when the game machine is opened.

(Resuming ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of being set will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-5. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the game medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer open (closed).

FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

While the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, during the period when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal is detected. Is also in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power cutoff (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout With respect to the unpaid number that has not been paid, the payout is executed, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and the control is not performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on, based on the fact that the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is off. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period in which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state but in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

In addition, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed and then opens the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. ..

When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number of The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. As described above, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, it is possible that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payment of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (moves to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7(1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is a game control micro. It is input to the I/O 105 of the computer 100 and the I/O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to clear the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and clear the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The RAM clearing and the clearing are both executed.

Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted because the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7(2), when the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout under execution is stopped and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed even if the payout is not restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. do not do.

FIG. 10-7(2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state but in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

When a store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and the PRDY signal is turned on. And

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the data of the unpaid number is stored. The payout operation is performed one by one until it becomes zero. As a result, the game medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game media is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7(2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining amount to be paid out). Because there is no game medium), even when the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to initialize the data of the unpaid number, so that the power is cut off (the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before (before) (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), not paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accompanied with this. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid amount, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modified example of ball lending process (switch to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 10-8(1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the above-mentioned clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

When the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is input to the I/O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I/O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

When the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. The 21TM052a is turned off. On the contrary, when the game control microcomputer 100 is not initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. Then, when the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure while the ball lending is being executed and the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. 10-8 (2) It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8(2), when the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout under execution is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout. ..

FIG. 10-8(2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, but maintains it in the off state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the off state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear is executed. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state but in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). Since the medium exists), the PRDY signal is turned on, and the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the game medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game media is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a backup in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned on because the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid) Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether the RAM clear for the game control microcomputer 100 (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power failure occurs (before the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts that have not been paid out , The payout will be executed.

Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game controlling microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid amount stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized, so the ball lending is performed. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, a period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout of the unpaid number is executed.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal in the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Limitation on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method for limiting the prize ball payout when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-9. FIG. 10-9 is a game control microcomputer when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of a signal between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and when the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls have flowed down is not physically connected to the upper plate that stores the flowing down prize balls, if the prize balls are dispensed in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it.

In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. Microcomputer 100 has detected passage of the game medium relating to any one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening. Based on the above, a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and a prize ball in-preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. This award ball preparation command is until the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

As described above, while the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, each gaming medium has each winning opening. Even if the winning award is detected after passing through, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the prize ball payout control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, a store clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Resumption of prize ball payout after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout of the prize balls, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the game medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer open (closed).

As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (from the time when the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal is received until the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened and the gaming machine frame/door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is used for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This award ball preparation command is until the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Does not execute payout of game media. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to operate based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid quantity becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

(Prize ball processing at the time of power failure (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 10-11 is used for the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted because the power is cut off while the prize balls are being paid out and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not controlled after the power is restored. It will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-11, the game medium payout is interrupted based on that the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is restarted.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (from the time when the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal is received until the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (after the power is turned on, the serial number shown in FIG. During the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the game medium payout is maintained in a suspended state.

As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (from power-on to the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10A (step Until the execution of S21TM1480)), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes 0. To do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and the payout operation is performed on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

In addition, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed and then opens the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The game medium is not paid out.

When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are detected. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On that condition, it is possible to restart the suspended game medium payout and complete the prize ball payout.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (moves to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted because the power is cut off while the payout of the prize balls is being performed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the power is cut off during execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout in progress is stopped, and when the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

As shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (from the time when the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal is received until the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a power-on process (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is suspended is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and the payout operation is performed on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Therefore, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state. In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It becomes a state.

When a store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). And the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and drives the payout motor 21TM289. Let

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payment of the game medium is restarted, and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game medium to be paid out is Since it does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to initialize the data of the number of unpaid items, so that the power is cut off (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14) to be paid out in the award ball processing that was executed before) No payout is made for the number of payouts.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure during the execution of the prize ball process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid amount, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modified example regarding prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted because the power is cut off while the payout of the prize balls is being executed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, refer to FIGS. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (from the time when the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal is received until the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a power-on process (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is suspended is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear is executed. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and the payout operation is performed on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on this, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). Since there is a medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid amount data becomes 1 until the data becomes 0. The payout operation is performed one by one. As a result, the game medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payment of the game medium is restarted, and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a backup in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether the RAM clear for the game control microcomputer 100 (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power failure occurs (before the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid amount that has not been paid out , The payout will be executed.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure during the execution of the prize ball process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, a period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout of the unpaid number is executed.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal in the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, even if a winning is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is no longer received, and thus the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and signal corresponding to setting change)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. By this security signal, as described above, the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraudulent activity detection, game stop target error detection, and the like have been performed can be notified to the outside. In addition, the security signal, until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started and the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until the period is determined to be NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed), the state becomes ON.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until the normal game process is executed during the period from step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 is determined to be NO) is turned on. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is turned off once, and then from the same 7th terminal of the RAM 102. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area are output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14(1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode accompanied by the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) at power-on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process. Also, with the completion of the setting change mode (to be precise, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the setting change mode has ended and the process has shifted to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14(2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not in the ON state.

In this way, the security signal remains in the ON state even during the period in which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the security signal is input based on the input. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the shift to the normal game processing), the OFF state is set. Regarding the security signal as well, it is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 10-15(3). Is not immediately turned off after the setting change mode is ended, and is kept on for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode is ended. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15(4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, at the timing when 50 ms has passed after the shift to the normal game processing, the state becomes OFF.

In addition, in both cases of FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, and the state is turned OFF at the timing when 50 ms has passed) Based on the fact that the set value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14(2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is the power-on time (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after the execution of clearing.

Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the setting change mode is not entered. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, there is a high possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clearing). If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. It is possible to recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the setting value).

That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) was executed, but the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. If it is recognizable by the management device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. If the management device can recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the set value), and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, The management device can recognize that there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (particularly, there is a high possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode with RAM clear). In this way, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the security signal is input based on the input. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be recognized separately.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Alternatively, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about 30 seconds while being controlled in the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is 0 when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal becomes the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

In this way, since the output period of the security signal differs between when the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (to be exact, the setting change mode Or, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was completed and the process was shifted to the normal game process, it is turned off. Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. Further, when the security signal input period is longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode is controlled and the RAM clear is executed accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without the RAM clear.

In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, so that the external device to which these signals are input has a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the game machine. It is possible to distinguish between the occurrence of and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

Next, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode is switched to and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15(5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. And, even if it is less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is finished (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state) to shift to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more, The setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

If the period in which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as the hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been entered. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Regarding the setting change correspondence signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change correspondence signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine can operate on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal switches to the ON state within 50 ms and then switches to the OFF state. When the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area and having a width of 100 ms is output, the period in which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is incorrect. May be recognized as As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), so that the external device side Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

10-16 is a diagram showing another example of the effect device included in the effect control board 12. FIG. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9 on the lamp control board 14, the first off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the second off-screen hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 and the setting change state indicator 21TM104 are connected, and these are each constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light of a common emission color.

The off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is configured by two light emitting devices. CPU120 for production control, when there is a change in the first reserved memory number, that is, when a winning in the first start winning port has occurred (when the first reserved memory number has increased), and the first special symbol. When the variable display of is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the first reserved memory number decreases), the first reserved memory number for designating the updated first reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen first reserved display 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command.

For example, when the first number of pending storages designated by the first number of pending storages designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. If the first number of reserved storages designated by the first number of reserved storages is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the first number of reserved storages designated by the first designated number of reserved storages is 3, one of the light emitting devices is in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is in a lighting state. Then, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designating command is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

The off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. CPU120 for production control, when there is a change in the second reserved memory number, that is, when a winning to the second start winning port has occurred (when the second reserved memory number has increased), and the second special symbol. When the variable display of is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the second reserved memory number decreases), the second reserved memory number that specifies the updated second reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second hold storage number designated by the second hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the second number of reserved storages designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the second number of reserved storages designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is in a lighting state. Then, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designating command is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

The fourth symbol display device 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one light emitting device is a variable display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, (Variable display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, it is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display is finished), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a variable display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, variation). (Display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the light is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display ends), and the display result is derived.

CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command that designates that the first reserved storage number has been subtracted, and the display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command that specifies the variation time of the special symbol, based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, And, the variable time of the first special symbol can be specified. In addition, the production control CPU 120, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the display result has been derived by ending the variable display of.

Here, the production control CPU 120, when receiving the one set of commands that accompanies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, blinks one light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 (that is, a variable display). When the variation time designated by the variation pattern command has elapsed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on in response to the receipt of the symbol confirmation designation command (that is, the display result is confirmed). ). For example, when a display result of "out of focus" was designated by the display result designation command, one of the light emitting devices was turned off in the symbol fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" was designated by the display result designation command. In this case, one light emitting device is turned on in the symbol fixing period.

CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command that designates that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted, and the display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command that designates a variation time of the special symbol, based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the variation time of the second special symbol. In addition, the production control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on having received the symbol confirmation designation command from the game controlling microcomputer 100, the second special symbol. It is possible to specify that the display result has been derived after the end of the variable display of.

Here, when the control CPU 120 for effect control receives the one set of commands that accompanies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variable display). When the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol fixing specification command (that is, the display result is fixed). ). For example, when the display result of "out" is specified by the display result specification command, the other light emitting device is turned off in the symbol fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" is specified by the display result specification command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on in the symbol fixing period.

It should be noted that the emission color of the first off-screen display indicator 21TM101 may be different from the emission color of the second off-screen display indicator 21TM102. For example, the former may emit blue light and the latter may emit red light. It may be allowed to. Further, in the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the light emitting color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A and the light emitting color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B are made different. For example, the former is made to emit light in blue (the same emission color as the off-screen first hold display 21TM101) and the latter is made to emit red (the same light emission color as the outside-screen second hold display 21TM102). You may do so.

In addition, an image showing the first number of reserved memories (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image showing the second number of reserved memories (for example, image of red numbers “0 to 4”) are displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 5. Further, in the case of an image of a fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a quadrangle image, blinking in white during a period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed (fluctuation), and the display result is out of alignment. Is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol fixing period, and is displayed in red during the symbol fixing period when the display result is a big hit), and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a quadrangle It is an image of, and blinks (fluctuations) in yellow during the period in which the second special symbol is variably displayed. If the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, an image which is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol fixing period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The status indicator 21TM104 is made to blink. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change status display 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform that the setting change mode indicator 21TM104 emits light indicating that the setting change mode is controlled (lighting state) and the setting confirmation mode is controlled (flashing state). Is becoming Here, compared with the period from when the power is turned on to when the image display device 5 can control the image display by the display control unit 123, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light emitting device after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the image by the display control unit 123. Even before the display control becomes possible), the fact that the setting change mode is controlled and the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the light emission mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It will be possible.

On the side of the effect control board 12, not only the setting change state display 21TM104, but also the out-of-screen first hold display 21TM101, the out-of-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. It may be possible to notify that the setting change mode is being controlled or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled by emitting a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern during the operation. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode by turning on all the LEDs that constitute the out-of-screen first reserved display 21TM101, the out-of-screen second reserved display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. Being informed, and controlling the setting confirmation mode by setting all the LEDs that make up the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 to a blinking state May be notified.

On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 has the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (for example, all are turned on at the same time). ), it is possible to inform that the setting change mode is controlled. In addition, during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 has the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the universal figure holding display device 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second. The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being played (and a light emission pattern which is also different when controlled in the setting change mode). It is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is being controlled by (for example, making all of them blink simultaneously).

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying a first hold storage number (0-4 first hold display 30TM001) and a second hold storage number (0-4 second hold). The second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and the active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first reserved display area 30TM101 is on the left side when viewed from the player with the active display area 30TM103 at the center. The right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

When the first reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 in the first reserved display area 30TM101 in a number corresponding to the first reserved storage number. That is, the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning a prize) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, is controlled to the big hit game state) Not, and, the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display region 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 is associated with the first hold display 30TM001 in an order close to the active display region 30TM103 (from the right as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

Further, when the second number of reserved storages is not 0, effect control CPU 120 displays a second number of second reserved displays 30TM002 corresponding to the number of second reserved memories in second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, the winning to the second start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) that is not satisfied and the second reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display region 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 is dealt with in the order close to the active display region 30TM103 (from the left as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003, after the start condition (eg, the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (eg, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the big hit game) It is information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) that the state is not controlled, and the number of retained memories is not 0).

In addition, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), a region different from the first reserved display region 30TM101, the first reserved memory number (0-4 sub reserved display 30TM004) is displayed. A sub-holding display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 which is a different area from the active display area 30TM103 and which displays a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the sub-holding display area 30TM004 is to be displayed on the sub-holding display area 30TM104 based on the determination that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is displayed at the time of the start winning (when the winning at the first starting winning opening occurs). The number of sub-holding displays 30TM004 corresponding to one holding storage number is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, the sub-holding display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol which is not satisfied, and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). In addition, the sub-active display 30TM005, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning a prize) is satisfied after the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-holding displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-holding display region 30TM104, a variation corresponding to the sub-holding display 30TM004 in an order close to the sub-active display region 30TM105 (from the right as seen by the player). The display start condition is met.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, the sub-holding display 30TM004 has a star-shaped contour, and has a contour different from the first holding display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). The sub-holding display 30TM004 is small in size compared to the first holding display 30TM001, and thus is less noticeable and less visible to the player. The sub active display 30TM005 also has a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). The sub-active display 30TM005 has a smaller display size than the active display 30TM003, and thus is less noticeable and has low visibility for the player.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 11A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative pattern being executed in the image display device 5, and the sub-active is also displayed. A sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. In this way, as information corresponding to one variable display (common variable display) being executed, information of different modes such as the active display 30TM003 and the sub active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

Corresponding to the first number of reserved memories being 4, four first reserved displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101, and four sub reserved displays are displayed in the sub reserved display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. In this way, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, the information of different modes such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the 1st hold display 30TM001 and the 1st hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the 1st hold display 30TM001 and the common variable display (hold memory) are simultaneously displayed. It is displayed on the screen.

In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, It is possible to diversify the effect using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effect using the active display and improve the interest.

Here, as will be described later, when it is determined that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the first holding display 30TM001 is displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101, The sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105, and further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. Information (the rectangular frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11A) will not be displayed either.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and/or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The first change effect is a special mode different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example) of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) Display) or a golden mode (in this example, a golden circle display) is a notice effect. Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, white star-shaped display) of the sub-holding display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize. It is a notice effect displayed in a blue mode (blue star display in this example) or a red mode (red star display in this example).

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a set of commands at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a It is confirmed whether or not a command for specifying addition of the number of reserved storages 1) has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit will be included in the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of big hit. CPU103, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot type when it is a jackpot, and designates the determination result Output the specified command. In addition, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern in the winning determination result. The CPU 103 determines whether normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined based on the variation pattern type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command designating the determination result. To do. Moreover, the 1st reservation storage number addition designation|designated command is a production|generation control command which designates that the 1st reservation storage number increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designating command) is newly stored in the start prize winning command storage area. To do. If a new set of commands at the time of starting winning is not received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

If a new set of commands for starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on that at least the first change effect is determined to be executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the first change effect and the final display mode, and whether to execute the second change effect and the final display mode, which will be described later. The determination is made based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 11-3) (step S30TM1030).

By executing the processing of steps S30TM1010 and S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processing of step S30TM1030 and subsequent steps is executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is generated. Alternatively, the second change effect can be executed.

FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode”. ,” and “golden mode” can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode”. Any of the above can be determined, and the determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Of these, "no display" indicates that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white mode at a rate of 4%). Triangle display), 18% of which is blue (blue circle), 21% of which is green (green circle), and 16% of which is red (red circle). ), and a golden mode (golden circle display) is obtained at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display which is the determination target at the time of winning a start is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69 % Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of winning the start is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting prize (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, a green mode at a rate of 20%, A ratio of 25% results in a red mode, and a ratio of 35% results in a golden mode. That is, the first change effect that makes the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the start winning different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

In this way, when the first change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the gold mode, the jackpot rate is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), regarding the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. ..

Further, as shown in a change pattern of a first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. May be Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift, or a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than that. It has been changed to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 11C, the ratio of selecting the special mode as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio of selecting the other modes. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, which will be described later, the ratio of the special pattern included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the ratio of other modes. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when it is displayed in other modes. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit compared to when it is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first holding storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70% but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). Is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning a start is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of a winning start. The second change effect in which the mode of the displayed information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), The sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first holding storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40% but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). Is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start is displayed at a rate of 60%, which corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the winning start. The second change effect in which the mode of the displayed information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

In this way, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the proportion of a big hit is higher than when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, if the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the jackpot rate is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), with respect to the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

Further, as shown in a change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode is a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub-holding display 30TM004 before the sub-active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift, or a display with higher expectation than that. It is designed to change according to the mode. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second It may be decided to execute the change effect (display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 and set the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 to a mode different from the normal mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute the (2-1) first change effect and not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is determined to execute the first change effect, and the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually Aspect)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and The sub active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 may be different from the normal mode.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually Aspect)).

In the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute neither the first change effect nor the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, (4-1) and (4) above. In the case of any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed in the normal mode. The first reserved display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first reserved memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory is started, The active display 30TM003 corresponding to does not change from the normal mode to another mode (change patterns 101, 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, 301, 401).

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the above (4-2), although the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning (first holding memory) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the corresponding sub active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1), and (2) above. In the case where either of -2) or (3) is applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

When it is determined to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is satisfied, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of reserved memories (the first number of reserved memories after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and 11-5) together with the updated first pending storage number (first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the determined sub-active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode (see FIG. 11-6 ).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect and not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in (2-1) and (2-2) above. If any of the above is true, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final of the determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In addition, in the case of corresponding to the above (2-2), although the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning (first holding memory) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the corresponding sub active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

When the CPU 120 for effect control determines not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, in the case of the above (3), the step is performed. In S30TM1210, based on the updated first pending storage number (first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined sub-active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3). In the case of (corresponding to), the prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In addition, when neither the notice effect of the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning (first holding memory) is displayed (in the case of (4-2) above). If applicable), also set the look-ahead counter.

A value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning is set (the value designated by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set in the prefetch counter, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the prefetch counter is decremented by 1 each time (each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received). That is, the value of the prefetch counter is decremented each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of the start winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0, the variable display (or the second change effect is not executed but the sub-holding display 30TM004 is displayed, which is the target of the first change effect and/or the second change effect. (Variable display) will be executed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the change control flag is set (steps S30TM1080 and S30TM1140). While the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new starting prize is generated, it is determined to be YES in step S30TM1020 described above, so that the new starting prize (new first reserved memory) is dealt with. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new starting winning (new first holding memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the number of first reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) by the start winning, (i) the n-th first reserved display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101. The timing (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a position (active display area 30TM103 side) having a higher variation rank in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n≧2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning is displayed ), there is a possibility that display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIG. 11-4 and FIG. 11-5, what is the display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern? It shows whether or not it becomes a display mode. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode in which a white circle is displayed, and “special” indicates a special mode in which a white triangle is displayed. “Blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-4(A). Select a table.

In the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In addition, in the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of start winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern for displaying the first reserved display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start and then changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 remains in the special mode after the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is In the change pattern, the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 remains blue after the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105.

Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode after the active shift. In addition, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the green mode finally after the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 107 is The change pattern is such that after the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the red mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). ˜412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red state after the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, depending on the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107.

Here, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201 described later, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the gold mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the gold mode. Further, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the gold mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). ˜412), the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red mode to the gold mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-4(B). Select a table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 201 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing.

When the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204. The change pattern 202 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift The change pattern 203 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at a timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 204 is a change target of the notice target at the start winning. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also changed at the active shift timing. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208. The change pattern 205 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the blue mode. The change pattern 206 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the time of winning the start and then announces at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first reserved display of the target in the special mode. After displaying the 1 hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains the blue form at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 208 is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 208 displays the first reserved display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first reserved display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the blue mode even at the timing of active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212. ing. The change pattern 209 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the red mode. The change pattern 210 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the notice is made at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 211 is a change pattern that changes the first reserved display of the target in the blue mode without changing the first reserved display of the target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the 1 hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains the red form at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 212 is a change pattern that does not change. The change pattern 212 displays the first reserved display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5(C). Select a table.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 301 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the reservation shift, and the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviating or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each 302. The change pattern 302 is such that, at the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and then the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern is such that the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305. The change pattern 303 is such that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern 304 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to the blue mode and the first notice display of the notice target is not changed to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the mode, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue state at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the blue mode even at the timing of active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310. The change pattern 306 is that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern that changes the first reserved display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of No. 1 is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notice display of the notice target is also made at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the hold display is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 308 is the first hold display of the notice target at the time of winning the start. After displaying in the blue mode, the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that is changed and does not change the first reservation display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 309 is that after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red state, and the active shift timing is changed. However, the change pattern 310 is a change pattern that does not change the first reservation display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of winning the start prize. Therefore, the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the red mode, the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target does not change even in the active shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the 1-hold display is not changed in the red mode.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5(D). Select a table.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 401 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 401 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. At the timing of the hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each 402. The change pattern 402 is such that, at the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and then the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice of the active shift timing is also changed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of No. 3 is not changed in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404. The change pattern 403 is that the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. The 1st hold display is a change pattern that does not change in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 shows the 1st hold display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the 1st hold display of the notification target at the timing of the first hold shift. The 1st hold display does not change in the blue mode, the 1st hold display of the notice target does not change even in the timing of the 2nd hold shift, and the 1st hold of the notice target is held in the 3rd hold shift timing This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode and the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 is that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 406 is a change pattern for changing the 1-hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first notice display of the notice target at the first hold shift timing. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first reservation display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. The change pattern 407 is a pattern that changes the first reserved display of the notice target to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the change pattern. The change pattern 407 is after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal form at the time of winning the start prize. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form, and the third hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the red state at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the blue mode, the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the notice is issued at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 409 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the target to a red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is held at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 410 is a change pattern that does not change the display in the red state, and the change pattern 410 displays the first notice display of the notice target in the blue state at the time of winning the start and then the first notice hold of the notice subject at the timing of the first hold shift. The display will remain blue No, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is kept in the red mode even at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 411 changes the first reserved display of the notification target to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first reserved display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern 412 is a change pattern that does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern in which, even after the hold display is displayed in the red form, the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the red form even at the timings of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the off or big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, the change pattern 408, the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, and the change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. In the case where the number of first reserved memories is n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning and it is determined to display the sub reserved display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005, (i ) The first to nth sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the first holding storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed as a sub-display. The timing (timing at the time of starting winning) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, (ii) the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning is at a position having a higher variation rank in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (the sub-active display area 30TM105). Timing (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing when the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (sub-active display corresponding to the starting winning) 30TM005 is displayed), the display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIG. 11-6, the display mode of the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is changed at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star-shaped display, and “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star-shaped display. "Red" indicates a red mode in which a red star is displayed.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-6(A). Select a table.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 601 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In addition, in the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted from the sub-holding display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the variation which is the determination target at the time of the start winning). The sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notification target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-holding display of the notification target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). In the case of ~905), the sub active display 30TM005 remains in the blue state after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 605 is the start pattern. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the red form at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). ~905), the sub active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906 described later). In the case of ˜912), the sub active display 30TM005 remains in the red state after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6(B). Select a table.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 701 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start prize (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 701 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and even in the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704. The change pattern 702 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 703 is a change pattern for changing the noticeable sub-holding display to a blue mode. The change pattern 703 displays the noticeable sub-holding display in the normal mode at the time of starting winning and then the noticeable target is held at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 704 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display is changed to a blue mode and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern, the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the blue state at the timing of the first holding shift and the timing of the active shift after being displayed.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), The determination values are assigned to the change patterns 703, 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708, respectively. The change pattern 705 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then change the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and to make the notice target at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 706 is a change pattern for changing the sub-holding display of the sub-holding display in the red mode. The change pattern 706 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue state at the time of winning the start prize, and then the sub-hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 707 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the display in the blue form. After the display, it is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the red mode at the active shift timing. Reference numeral 708 represents a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and thereafter the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the first hold shift and the active shift timing. ..

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6(C). Select a table.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 801 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 801 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 802 to 804. The change pattern 802 is such that after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 803 is the noticeable target at the time of starting winning. After displaying the sub-holding display in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-holding target of the notice is set at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift The change pattern 804 does not change the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808. The change pattern 805 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then change the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the timing of the second hold shift. Is a change pattern for changing the sub-holding display of the notice target to a red mode and changing the sub-hold display of the notice target to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. A change pattern 806 is a sub-hold display of the notice target at the start winning. Is displayed in the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern 807 is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 807 is the first time after the noticeable sub-holding display is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start. It is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a red state at the timing of the hold shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the red state at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift. The pattern 808 does not change the noticeable sub-holding display in the red state at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the active shift after displaying the noticeable sub-holding display in the red state at the time of winning the start. It is a change pattern.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6(D). Select a table.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 901 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the first, second, and third hold shift timings and the active shift timing in the normal mode. It is a change pattern that does not change.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 902 to change pattern 905. The change pattern 902 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third time is displayed. Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the holding shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the active shift timing. After displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is held at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and the sub-hold display of the notice target that is not changed remains in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-holding display in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to a blue state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is made at the timing of the second, third hold shift and the active shift. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of No. is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the first, second, and third hold shifts after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state at the timing and the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 906 to 912. The change pattern 906 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 is such that the sub-holding display of the notice subject is displayed in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift after the sub-holding display of the notice subject is displayed in the normal form at the time of winning the start. The sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the red state at a timing, and the change pattern 908 is the timing of the first hold shift after the noticeable sub-holding display is displayed in the normal manner at the time of winning the start prize. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice of the notice target is changed at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The sub-holding display is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display is not changed in the red form. The change pattern 909 shows the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue form at the time of the start winning and then the notice target at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. The sub-holding display of is not changed in the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notification target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notification target is kept in the red mode at the active shift timing. The change pattern 910 is a change pattern that is not changed. After the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Change without changing the noticeable sub-holding display in red at the timing of the second hold shift, and keeping the noticeable sub-holding display in red at the timing of the third hold shift or active shift. The change pattern 911 is a change pattern 911. In the change pattern 911, the noticeable sub-holding display is displayed in blue at the time of the start winning, and then the noticeable sub-holding display is red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 912 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the notice target at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which after displaying the sub-holding display in the red mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the timing of the active shift.

As shown in FIG. 11C, the ratio of the first change effect in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is determined by the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the second change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is executed with high frequency, and thus the player with respect to the notice effect Can keep the interest of. On the other hand, with regard to the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility, the percentage of the big hit is different depending on whether or not the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are themselves displayed. It will be noted whether or not the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the jackpot expectation degree when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, whether or not the display mode changes. Will also pay attention to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (sub hold display 30TM004 or sub active displayed at the top of the screen). The size and shape of display 30TM005) are different. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a circle, and the other icon (sub hold display 30TM004 or sub active display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. As a result, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily understand the difference (the display information is of different types). Further, it is possible to diversify the effect by the icon corresponding to the variable display and improve the interest.

Also, like the relationship between the red-form first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-form sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color corresponding to the common variable display is displayed. Icons (however, the shape is different between a round shape and a star shape) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variable display.

Also, like the relationship between the red-colored active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-colored sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, an icon of a common display color corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. (However, the shape is different between the round shape and the star shape) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display being executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the jackpot expectation degree is different depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red-form sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both of the hold display forms, and the hold display is displayed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the aspect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11C, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 of the gold mode and the red mode). Since the combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both active display modes, which enhances the entertainment of changing the display mode of the active display. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is inherited during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. As a result, the player can be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. ), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is inherited during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is when changing the mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. More change patterns are provided. In this way, the first change effect and the second change effect are prevented while preventing the effect from becoming excessively complicated by changing the type of effectable effect and the effect pattern depending on the visibility of the active display and the hold display. I am trying to raise the interest of change production appropriately.

(Specific examples of first change effect and second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 at the time of execution.

First, in FIG. 11-8(1), in the state where the first number of reserved memories is 3, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs is started on the image display device 5 (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-7). (Variable display) is being executed. At this time, the normal display active display 30TM003 (white circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the normal hold first display 30TM001 (white circle display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed three times. At this time, the sub hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-8(2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new winning is made. It is assumed that a start winning for the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning as the determination target (in this example, the gold mode). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays before the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the fact that the first number of reserved memories is 4, four normal mode sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) are displayed.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and FIG. 11-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. However, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the starting winning (first reserved memory) that occurs after that is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub hold display 30TM004 that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. )) to the end of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (sub-hold display 30TM004) (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. The first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, special mode, blue mode, or red mode) during the period. In addition, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start winning is achieved. The corresponding sub-holding display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In the present example, since the number of the first reserved memories is 4 based on the winning a prize for starting, the fourth reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub reserved display area 30TM104 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-holding display 30TM004 is a holding display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of advance notice by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8(4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 is erased. The sub-holding display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the normal mode sub-holding display 30TM004 that was displayed as the sub-holding display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8(4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(5), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8(6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, The 1st hold display (the 1st hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the 1st hold display 30TM001a of the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (normal-mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1 Shift display is performed on the sub active display area 30TM105 side one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8(6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(7), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8(8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) and the blue mode displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are deleted. The sub-holding display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display) is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (first reserved display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-9(9), the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-9(10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed on the screen is erased, and the sub-holding display (red-mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display)) displayed on the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is displayed on the sub-active display area 30TM105. After the shift display, the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-7, the active display area 30TM103 is changed to the red display active display 30TM003c to the final display display (gold in this example). A change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

If the sub active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 within the period shown from T7 to T8 in FIG. 11-7. Change the mode. For example, when the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 determined at the time of starting winning is the red mode and the sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in the blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The sub active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the letters "REACH!!" are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, since the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden at the timing when the reach state is established, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from decreasing and the interest to decrease. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-7).

As described above, as the reach effect is executed in the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which have at least a part of the display area in common with the area in which the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display that are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed can be continuously displayed at the upper part of the screen during the period when the reach effect is executed. The player can see them. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of held memories even during the execution of the reach effect, and can grasp the display mode of the sub-held display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example of the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of winning the start prize will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. FIG. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production image.

First, in FIG. 11-11(1), in the state where the first number of reserved memories is 3, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is started on the image display device 5 (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10). (Variable display) is being executed. At this time, the normal display active display 30TM003 (white circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the normal hold first display 30TM001 (white circle display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed three times.

Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-11(2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new winning is made. It is assumed that a start winning is generated in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning as the determination target (in this example, the gold mode). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example). In addition, in this example, it is assumed that it is determined that the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is also not executed). Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays before the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control does not display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed by the determination at the time of winning the start, and Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. However, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the starting winning (first reserved memory) that occurs after that is prohibited. In the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, from the display of the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect to the end of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10) is set.

As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. The first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, special mode, blue mode, or red mode) during the period. In addition, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start winning is achieved. The corresponding sub-holding display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first number of pending storages is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 is the notice subject by the first change effect. Is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11(3), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11(4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11(4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11(5), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11(6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The image display device is configured to shift-display one by one the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 side. At step 5, the next variable display is started.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11(6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11(7), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11(8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The image display device is configured to shift-display one by one the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b of the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 side. At step 5, the next variable display is started.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11(8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first reservation display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (first reservation display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-12(9), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next change in the image display device 5 is performed. Start display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-10, in the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c in the red form is changed to the final display form (gold in this example).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decorative pattern (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the letters "REACH!!" are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden at the timing when the reach state is established. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-10).

As described above, when it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of winning the start prize, a new start prize is given until the end of the variable display which is the target of the first change effect. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start winning is not executed. In this way, after the display mode of the first reserved display 30TM001 in the highly visible first reserved display area 30TM101 is once changed (after being set to a mode different from the normal mode), a new start prize is generated thereafter. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start winning in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 having low visibility, the player is focused on the first change effect having high visibility, The change display that is different from the change display that is the target of the first change effect is prevented from being complicated by the execution of the second change effect.

In the present embodiment, when a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although an example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). Is displayed in a different manner), if a new start winning occurs, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start winning can be executed, but at that time The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be lower than that before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

In addition, when a new start winning occurs after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), not only the second change effect but also another notice It is also possible to limit the execution of the effect. For example, the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display based on the new start prize is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved memory number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect by displaying "3", "2", "1", and "0" along with the subtraction by one. Further, the background change effect for changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although an example in which execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is prohibited is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually When a new start winning is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new starting prize can be executed but corresponds to the new starting prize. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is not displayed, or the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is displayed, but the display mode is normally set. The mode may remain unchanged).

(Modifications regarding the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and the second hold display 30TM004 is operated. The mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-holding effect effect.

11-13, 11-14, and 11-15 are specific examples of a case where the first hold effect effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-hold effect effect is executed in the second change effect.

First, FIG. 11-13(1) shows a state in which the first display memory number is 3, and the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. At this time, the normal display active display 30TM003 (white circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the normal hold first display 30TM001 (white circle display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed three times. At this time, the sub hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

Then, when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning as the determination target (in this example, the gold mode). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays before the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the first number of reserved memories is 4, four normal mode sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) are displayed.

In the present example, since the number of the first reserved memories is 4 based on the winning a prize for starting, the fourth reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub reserved display area 30TM104 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-holding display 30TM004 is a holding display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of advance notice by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13(3), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time displays the first reserved display area 30TM101. The hold displays 30TM001 are shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-holding display 30TM004 is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the normal mode sub-holding display 30TM004 that was displayed as the sub-holding display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode (during execution of the variable display). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding action effect and determines the type (character type) of the first holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in Fig. 11-13(4), the character A appears and the effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001 of the notice target is executed. By displaying the image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the first reserved display 30TM001 of the target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(5), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special notice of the first hold display of the notice target in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13(6), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(7), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time displays the first display in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 is displayed. While the active display 30TM005 is erased, the sub-holding display (the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the normal mode (white star display)) displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is displayed one by one on the side of the sub-active display area 30TM105. Then, the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the special mode to the blue mode (during execution of the variable display). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first reserved display 30TM001b) which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding action effect and determines the type (character type) of the first holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, the sub-holding display of the notice target during the execution of the variable display from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example). Then, it is recognized that the sub-holding display 30TM004b) which is a blue star display is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect, and also determines the type (character type) of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

Based on these determination results, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first holding action effect (action effect B). In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(7), the character B appears and the effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001a of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first reservation display 30TM001a of the notice target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reservation display 30TM001a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display of the notice target in blue from the special mode in response to the execution of the first hold operation effect (action effect B). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example.

The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-holding effect effect (effect effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14(9), the character a appears and an effect is performed in which the balloon is blown toward the preliminary reservation display 30TM004. As shown in FIGS. 11-14(10) and 11-15(11), the balloon that the character a has flown flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 that is the subject of advance notice, and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the preliminary reservation target sub-holding display 30TM004, the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-holding display 30TM004F). ) Changes to. Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and (14), executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) and displays the notice of the sub-holding display in the normal mode. From the blue mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (15), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and also displays the first reserved display area 30TM101. Shift display (holding display 30TM001b of normal mode and first holding display 30TM001b of blue mode) is displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105. While the active display 30TM005 is erased, the sub-holding display displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the normal mode (white star display) and the sub-holding display 30TM004b in the blue mode (blue star display) )) are shifted and displayed one by one on the side of the sub active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display, changes the blue display from the blue mode to the first reserved display of the notice target during the execution of the variable display. In this example, it is recognized that the first hold display 30TM001c), which is a red round display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding action effect and determines the type (character type) of the first holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, the sub-holding display of the notice target during the execution of the variable display from the blue mode to the red mode (this example. Then, it is recognized that the sub-holding display 30TM004c) which is a red star display is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect, and also determines the type (character type) of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

Based on these determination results, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C). In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (17), the character C appears and the effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001b of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reserved display 30TM001b of the notice target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reservation display of the notice target to change from the blue mode to red in response to the execution of the first reservation operation effect (operation effect C). The mode (first reserved display 30TM001c, which is a red round display in this example) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-holding effect effect (effect effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (19), the character b appears and an effect is performed in which the balloon is blown toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b that is the subject of advance notice. As shown in FIG. 11-15(20) and FIG. 11-15(21), the balloon blown by the character b flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is the subject of advance notice, and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004b.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the preliminary reservation display 30TM004b of the notice target, the mode of the secondary reservation display 30TM004b is a balloon shape (secondary reservation display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in (23) and (24) of FIG. Is changed to a red mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c, which is a red star display). ..

In this way, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub hold effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub hold display. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest caused by the presence of a plurality of types of hold correspondence displays (first hold display and sub-hold display).

As shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, the effect in which the character appears and performs an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed, Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the character A appearing and executing the active action effect of performing the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). In addition, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect is performed in which the character a appears and the action of blowing the balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005 is performed. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). In this way, since the effect modes are different between the active action effect executed when changing the mode of the active display and the sub active effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub active display, there are a plurality of types. The interest due to the presence of the display (corresponding to the active display and the sub-active display) corresponding to the above can be further improved.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may be different according to the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) has a higher ratio that the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Also, the ratio that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself are displayed) may be set high. Further, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of times the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 changes is larger when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, 3 times). ) The change pattern may be selected at a high rate, and the change pattern having a large number of changes in the display color of the sub-holding display 30TM004 (for example, twice) may be selected at a high rate.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning occurs, but as described above, the active display mode during the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggesting effect that suggests that there is a possibility of changing. This change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

When the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 is different in the display form of the active display during the active shift from the final display form of the active display determined when the start winning is generated. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during execution of the variable display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode. FIG. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIG. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

When the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 11-16(A). As shown in FIG. 11-16(A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is executed twice, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 011 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the special mode.

When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 012 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 013 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed as the special mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 014 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. Change the display to a blue mode, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the green mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode. The change pattern 015 is a change pattern 015. After the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect in a failure mode to keep the active display in a blue mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect in a success mode to perform active display. Is a change pattern for changing the color to green.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 016 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. Change the display to a blue mode, then change the active display to a green mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, then change the active display to a red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, After that, it is a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 017 shows the success mode change suggestion effect after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, then execute the change mode suggestion of success mode to change the active display to blue mode, and then execute the change suggestion mode of success mode to change the active display to green. Change pattern that changes to the mode, then executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode and does not change the active display in the green mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the successful mode and changes the active display to the red mode Is.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is executed 5 times, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 018 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. Change the display to a blue mode, then change the active display to a green mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, then change the active display to a red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, After that, the change pattern is a change pattern in which the success indication change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is changed to the gold appearance.

When the active display during the active shift is in the special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 11-16(B). As shown in FIG. 11-16(B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the blue mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is executed twice, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue state.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The change suggestion effect in the change patterns 022 and 023 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and activated. The change pattern 023 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the green mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in the special mode during the active shift. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern for executing the suggestion effect and changing the active display to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 024 is such that after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The display is changed to the green mode, then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and the active display is changed to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern 025. After the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a green mode, then execute a change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display in the green mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect of the success mode to perform the active display. Is a change pattern for changing the color to red.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is executed four times, of which the success mode is four times and the failure mode is zero times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and activated. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a gold mode It is a pattern.

When the active display during the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16C. As shown in FIG. 11-16(C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the green mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is executed twice, and the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 031 is such that after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green state.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 are selected with a probability of 80% and 20%, respectively. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is executed 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 033 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode, and the change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is executed three times, of which the success mode is three times and the failure mode is zero. The change pattern 034 is such that after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

When the active display during the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 11-16(D). As shown in FIG. 11-16(D), in the active display change pattern determination table for red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is executed once, of which the success mode is one and the failure mode is zero. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in a red mode during the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-16, within one variable display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach display is started after the variable display is started. Within the period until the condition is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, particularly, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the display color changes to the jackpot expectation. The percentage is high.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage when the n-th change suggestion effect is executed, the higher the number of times the success-mode change suggestion effect is executed is, the higher the ratio of the (n+1)th change suggestion effect is executed. Is configured. For example, at the stage when the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n=2), if both of the success modes are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. When one of the two times is the success mode and one is the failure mode, the change suggestion effect of the third time may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n=3 and the case of n=4. As described above, when the change suggesting effect is executed, the more the number of times the success mode change suggesting effect is executed within the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the same change. Since the rate at which the next change suggesting effect is executed is high within the display period (the period from the start of the variable display until the reach state is established), the number of executions of the change suggesting effect, particularly the success mode, is performed by the player. The attention is paid to the number of times the change suggesting effect is executed, which can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed] to the [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] in one variable display period, the larger the jackpot expectation. The rate at which the display mode changes to a high degree is high. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode/the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case of 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. Thus, the larger the [number of executions of change suggestion effect of success mode/number of executions of change suggestion effect], the higher the rate of change of the active display to the display mode of high jackpot expectation, Pays attention to the relationship between the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and thus the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is high. Specifically, the number of continuous success mode change suggestion effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and when the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the success mode change suggesting effect is continuously executed, and how many times the success suggesting effect is continuously executed.

Further, in this example, when the final display mode has the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern having a greater number of succession change suggestive effects. For example, in the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected more than in the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern is more than the change pattern 015 (two continuous). 014 (three consecutive) is selected at a higher rate, and in the red mode, the change pattern 016 (four consecutive) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (three consecutive). In this way, even if the final display colors are the same, it is possible to further enhance the player's expectation by making it easier for the success suggestion change suggestion effects to continue.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect, based on the change pattern shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect based on whether each change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. As types of change suggestion effects, a change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears, a change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears, and the character. There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

When the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is the success mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n+1)th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Success mode, with next performance execution] table is selected. If the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect execution is performed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

When the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a success mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n+1)th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Success mode, no next performance execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is the failure mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n+1)th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Failure mode, performance is performed next time] is selected. In the case where the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, there is next effect execution], the character A is 37%, the character B is 32%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 1%, and the character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n+1)th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Failure mode, no next performance execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no effect is performed next time], 35% of character A, 30% of character B, 30% of character C, 5% of character D, and 0% of character E. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect, based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-17. Therefore, when the nth and n+1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the n+1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n+1th time may be executed, while n+1. There is a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A, which is the same as the nth time, appears, is executed at the first time. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of being a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of being a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E will be displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the change suggestion effect of this time is the last one).

In this way, since the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high jackpot expectation rate depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. In addition, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player will pay attention to which type of character appears.

Not limited to the effect types shown in FIGS. 11 to 17, for example, an effect type in which the display mode of the active display changes at a low rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also low may be provided. An effect type may be provided in which the rate of change in the display mode of the display is high and the rate of execution of the next change suggestion effect is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18, 11-19 (9) to (12), and FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the golden mode at the time of winning the start prize. In addition, it is an example of a case where the mode at the time of active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 018. .. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the green mode at the time of winning the start prize. And an example in which it is determined that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and the variation pattern of the active display is determined to be the variation pattern 014 when the variable display based on the starting winning is started. Is.

In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It has been decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the change suggestion effect for the second time, and the change suggestion effect for the third time is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in the success mode based on the fact that the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect is executed, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is determined that the change suggestion effect D of the success mode is executed based on the determination and the change suggestion effect of the fifth time, and the success mode in which the character E appears for the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the change suggestion effect E is decided to be executed.

11-18(1), the active display 30TM003 (white round display) of the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed on the image display device 5. It shows the state.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect A in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1), the character A appears from the right side of the screen, the effect image in which the character A performs the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, and subsequently, FIG. As shown in -18(2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the normal mode active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image that reminds that the active display has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18(3), in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) of a special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect B in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(4), the character B appears from the left side of the screen, the effect image in which the character B performs the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, and subsequently, FIG. As shown in -18(5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, in the active display area 30TM103, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18(6), in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in a blue mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect C in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(7), the character C appears from the right side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character C performs the action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed, and continuously. As shown in FIG. 11-18(8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19(9), in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect, a green mode active display 30TM003d (green circular display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19(10), the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and subsequently. As shown in FIG. 11-19(11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in a red mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect E in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which a transparent member (such as a glass plate) forming the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. .. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the crack range is enlarged is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(15), an image in which the transparent member forming the screen of the image display device 5 is broken (screen crack image 30TM210) is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20(16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in a gold mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20(18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 11-20(19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state in which the same decorative pattern (“7” in this example) is stopped in the display area is established, and the letters “REACH!!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen (area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The performance is executed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the active display 30TM003e in the gold mode is hidden and the square frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and (19), (10), (20) to (22) of FIG. 11-19, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be the green mode at the time of winning the start prize. In addition, it is an example of a case where the mode at the time of active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014. ..

In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It has been decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the change suggestion effect for the second time, and the change suggestion effect for the third time is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in the success mode based on the fact that the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect is executed, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it is determined and the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode is decided to be executed based on the fact that the change suggestion effect of the fifth time is not executed.

11-18(1) to 11-19(9) are the same as the effect examples of the change pattern 018 described above (the first change suggesting effect to the third change suggesting effect), which are the same. 11-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the failure mode change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19(10), the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and subsequently. As shown in FIG. 11-19(20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 is continuously displaying the green active display 30TM003d, the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and instead, the character D throws and does not hit. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19(21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the active display 30TM003d in the green mode. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), the reach state in which the same decorative design (in this example, “4”) is stopped in the left design display region and the right design display region is established, and “reach!! The reach effect in which the character "" is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103) is executed. Here, since the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established as described above, the green active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the noticeable variable display ends.

As shown in FIG. 11-18(1) to FIG. 11-20(19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is continuously executed on the image display device 5. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggesting effect of a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display region and the right symbol display region to establish the reach state. That is, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggesting effect a predetermined number of times, the left, middle, and right decorative designs on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped, the direction of variable display is changed, and the reach state is changed. It is not established. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the change suggestion effect is performed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not change, and thus the change suggestion effect can be more focused.

Although FIG. 11-16 shows a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggestive effects are not continuous, the invention is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which failure mode change suggestive effects are continuous may be provided. .. Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed three times and then the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed twice. Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed once or more, but the display mode of the active display does not change because the success mode change suggestion effect is not executed once.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display mode is always displayed when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. Although an example in which the display mode changes is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, it is activated at a higher rate than when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. It suffices that the display mode of the display is changed, and for example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even if the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided. An effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes even when the suggestive effect is executed may be provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is the display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode and the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a gold mode) has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestive effect of a successful mode is executed. May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is higher by two levels or more (for example, a normal mode to a green mode, a blue mode to a gold mode, etc.). Further, the rate of change in the display mode in two or more stages may be different according to the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears When the display mode is changed, the rate of change of the display mode by two stages or more is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate of change of the display mode is two stages or more. Is also good. Furthermore, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages without fail.

In the above embodiment, the change suggesting effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the fluctuating display of the decorative design is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and then re-varied is executed once or more, before the temporary stop of the decorative design. You may make it perform the change suggestion production of a success mode. For example, when the temporary stop is executed n times, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed before each temporary stop (the success mode change suggestion effect is executed n times in succession), and thereafter. The failure mode change suggestion effect may be executed to indicate that the (n+1)th temporary stop is not executed. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change is not executed even once, only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. Further, when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n+1 times), n+1 times of success suggestion change effect productions are continuously performed. It is also possible to provide an effect pattern that is executed but does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode.

In the case of such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (the character). Perform an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and takes action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed and the first time. After the re-change of No. is started, the character B appears and performs an action, and the display mode of the active display changes from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-change changes. After the start, the character C may appear and take action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (that is, the period in which the variation mode of the decorative pattern is changed), the change suggestive effect can be noticed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped from being lowered.

In addition, when performing the effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started in the state in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the vertical direction (the character appears). It is preferable that the change suggesting effect be ended (the display mode of the active display is changed by the action of the character) before the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is changed to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the first character appears and performs an action, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative pattern changes from the vertical direction. After the change in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing when the variable display direction of the decorative pattern changes, the change suggestion effect can be paid attention, and the variable display of the decorative pattern can be displayed. It is possible not to reduce the effect of the effect when the direction changes.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect is an example that is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a mode, and the change suggestion effect is the display mode of the hold display. It may be an effect that suggests that the change. For example, the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

In the above-described embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is a similar action (effect that acts on the active display or the hold display, for example, the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, while the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display, In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform the action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In addition, the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect. For example, in the success mode change suggestion effect, an active display or a pending display to be changed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction of (the effect that acts on the active display or the hold display) is performed. In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in the direction different from the active display or the hold display (the active display or the hold display is displayed. You may make it perform the effect).

In the above-described embodiment, the larger the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until the reach state is established, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period. The higher the ratio of the execution frequency of the change suggestion effect executed in the predetermined period to the execution frequency of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the jackpot expectation degree is. .. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary suspension of the decorative pattern (the combination of the decorative patterns or the pseudo continuous pattern that will be re-varied (pseudo-repeated) after the temporary stop) It may be a period, or may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative design until the decorative design is temporarily stopped again after the decorative design is changed again (that is, a period between pseudo-relations). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the first stop of any one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern It may be the period until the fixed stop.

In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggesting effects are executed, there may be a plurality of patterns of periods from the end of one change suggesting effect to the start of the next change suggesting effect. For example, when the interval from the end of the change suggestion effect 1 to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate of success of the next change suggestion effect is higher than that when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree is high. May be higher. Further, when the change suggestion effect is performed many times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and accordingly, the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased. According to such a form, the player determines whether the next change suggestion effect is executed when the change suggestion effect 1 is finished and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interest.

In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set value (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case where the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than in the case where the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do so. Further, compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) changes the display color of the active display more times (for example, 3 times or more). The pattern selection rate may be high, that is, the success mode change suggestion effect may be executed and the success mode change suggestion effect may be continuous. Further, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the change suggestion effect of the specific type is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, the effect in which the character X having a low appearance frequency appears). May be executed at a higher rate.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuits 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Holding storage means for storing information regarding variable display as holding storage;
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold storage,
When starting the variable display, and can display the display control means as a corresponding view the hold display corresponding to the variable display,
A change suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
Equipped with
Depending on the aspect of the correspondence display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The change suggestion effect includes a success pattern in which the correspondence display changes, and a failure pattern in which the correspondence display does not change,
When the number of times the success pattern change suggestion effect has been executed in the predetermined period of the variable display is a predetermined number , a specific period that is a period later than the predetermined period of the variable display than when the number of times is less than the predetermined number. In the above , the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed is high ,
Depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success pattern is continuously executed, the proportion of the aspect of the correspondence display is different,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images